1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*- 2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates-- 4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in 5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c 6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op 7 @c in config/tc-*.c 8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op 9 @c in config/obj-*.c 10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c 11 @c %**start of header 12 @setfilename as.info 13 @c ---config--- 14 @macro gcctabopt{body} 15 @code{\body\} 16 @end macro 17 @c defaults, config file may override: 18 @set have-stabs 19 @c --- 20 @c man begin NAME 21 @c --- 22 @include asconfig.texi 23 @include bfdver.texi 24 @c --- 25 @c man end 26 @c --- 27 @c common OR combinations of conditions 28 @ifset COFF 29 @set COFF-ELF 30 @end ifset 31 @ifset ELF 32 @set COFF-ELF 33 @end ifset 34 @ifset AOUT 35 @set aout-bout 36 @end ifset 37 @ifset ARM/Thumb 38 @set ARM 39 @end ifset 40 @ifset Blackfin 41 @set Blackfin 42 @end ifset 43 @ifset BOUT 44 @set aout-bout 45 @end ifset 46 @ifset H8/300 47 @set H8 48 @end ifset 49 @ifset SH 50 @set H8 51 @end ifset 52 @ifset HPPA 53 @set abnormal-separator 54 @end ifset 55 @c ------------ 56 @ifset GENERIC 57 @settitle Using @value{AS} 58 @end ifset 59 @ifclear GENERIC 60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET}) 61 @end ifclear 62 @setchapternewpage odd 63 @c %**end of header 64 65 @c @smallbook 66 @c @set SMALL 67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine 68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly. 69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so 70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections. 71 @c 72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables, 73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on. 74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page 75 @c break. 76 @c 77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook, 78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you 79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the 80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your 81 @c discretion, of course. 82 @ifinfo 83 @set SMALL 84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook, 85 @c might as well show 'em anyways. 86 @end ifinfo 87 88 @ifnottex 89 @dircategory Software development 90 @direntry 91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler. 92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler. 93 @end direntry 94 @end ifnottex 95 96 @finalout 97 @syncodeindex ky cp 98 99 @copying 100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}". 101 102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT 103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 104 105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document 106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; 108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no 109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the 110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. 111 112 @c man end 113 @end copying 114 115 @titlepage 116 @title Using @value{AS} 117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler 118 @ifclear GENERIC 119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family 120 @end ifclear 121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE 122 @sp 1 123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE} 124 @end ifset 125 @sp 1 126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION} 127 @sp 1 128 @sp 13 129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer 130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the 131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}. 132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for 133 distracting the boss while they got some work 134 done. 135 @sp 3 136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends 137 @page 138 @tex 139 {\parskip=0pt 140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par 141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par 142 } 143 %"boxit" macro for figures: 144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3) 145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt 146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil 147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline 148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box 149 @end tex 150 151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll 152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 153 154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document 155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; 157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no 158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the 159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. 160 161 @end titlepage 162 @contents 163 164 @ifnottex 165 @node Top 166 @top Using @value{AS} 167 168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}} 169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE 170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE} 171 @end ifset 172 version @value{VERSION}. 173 @ifclear GENERIC 174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate 175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures. 176 @end ifclear 177 178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free 179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the 180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. 181 182 @menu 183 * Overview:: Overview 184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options 185 * Syntax:: Syntax 186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation 187 * Symbols:: Symbols 188 * Expressions:: Expressions 189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives 190 @ifset ELF 191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes 192 @end ifset 193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features 194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs 195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What 196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License 197 * AS Index:: AS Index 198 @end menu 199 @end ifnottex 200 201 @node Overview 202 @chapter Overview 203 @iftex 204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}. 205 @ifclear GENERIC 206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate 207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures. 208 @end ifclear 209 @end iftex 210 211 @cindex invocation summary 212 @cindex option summary 213 @cindex summary of options 214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details, 215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}. 216 217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler. 218 219 @ignore 220 @c man begin SEEALSO 221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}. 222 @c man end 223 @end ignore 224 225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem 226 @c to be limited to one line for the header. 227 @smallexample 228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS 229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}] 230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}] 231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}] 232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}] 233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}] 234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}] 235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}] 236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}] 237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] 238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}] 239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] 240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] 241 [@b{--statistics}] 242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] 243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] 244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}] 245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}] 246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}] 247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}] 248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}] 249 @c 250 @c man end 251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted. 252 @c Add an empty line for separation. 253 @c man begin TARGET 254 @ifset AARCH64 255 256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:} 257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] 258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] 259 @end ifset 260 @ifset ALPHA 261 262 @emph{Target Alpha options:} 263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}] 264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}] 265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}] 266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}] 267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}] 268 @end ifset 269 @ifset ARC 270 271 @emph{Target ARC options:} 272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] 273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}] 274 [@b{-mcode-density}] 275 [@b{-mrelax}] 276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] 277 @end ifset 278 @ifset ARM 279 280 @emph{Target ARM options:} 281 @c Don't document the deprecated options 282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]] 283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]] 284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}] 285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}] 286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}] 287 [@b{-mthumb}] 288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] 289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}| 290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}] 291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}] 292 @end ifset 293 @ifset Blackfin 294 295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:} 296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]] 297 [@b{-mfdpic}] 298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}] 299 [@b{-mnopic}] 300 @end ifset 301 @ifset CRIS 302 303 @emph{Target CRIS options:} 304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}] 305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}] 306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}] 307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}] 308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented. 309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}] 310 @end ifset 311 @ifset D10V 312 313 @emph{Target D10V options:} 314 [@b{-O}] 315 @end ifset 316 @ifset D30V 317 318 @emph{Target D30V options:} 319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}] 320 @end ifset 321 @ifset EPIPHANY 322 323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:} 324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}] 325 @end ifset 326 @ifset H8 327 328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:} 329 [-h-tick-hex] 330 @end ifset 331 @ifset HPPA 332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet). 333 @end ifset 334 @ifset I80386 335 336 @emph{Target i386 options:} 337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}] 338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] 339 @end ifset 340 @ifset I960 341 342 @emph{Target i960 options:} 343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c 344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}| 345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}] 346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}] 347 @end ifset 348 @ifset IA64 349 350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:} 351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}] 352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}] 353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}] 354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}] 355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}] 356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}] 357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}] 358 @end ifset 359 @ifset IP2K 360 361 @emph{Target IP2K options:} 362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}] 363 @end ifset 364 @ifset M32C 365 366 @emph{Target M32C options:} 367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex] 368 @end ifset 369 @ifset M32R 370 371 @emph{Target M32R options:} 372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}| 373 @b{--W[n]p}] 374 @end ifset 375 @ifset M680X0 376 377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:} 378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}] 379 @end ifset 380 @ifset M68HC11 381 382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:} 383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}] 384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}] 385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}] 386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}] 387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}] 388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}] 389 @end ifset 390 @ifset MCORE 391 392 @emph{Target MCORE options:} 393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}] 394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}] 395 @end ifset 396 @ifset METAG 397 398 @emph{Target Meta options:} 399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}] 400 @end ifset 401 @ifset MICROBLAZE 402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:} 403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options. 404 @end ifset 405 @ifset MIPS 406 407 @emph{Target MIPS options:} 408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]] 409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}] 410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}] 411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}] 412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}] 413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}] 414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}] 415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}] 416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}] 417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}] 418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}] 419 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}] 420 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}] 421 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}] 422 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}] 423 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}] 424 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}] 425 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}] 426 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}] 427 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}] 428 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}] 429 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}] 430 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}] 431 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}] 432 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}] 433 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}] 434 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}] 435 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}] 436 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}] 437 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}] 438 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}] 439 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}] 440 @end ifset 441 @ifset MMIX 442 443 @emph{Target MMIX options:} 444 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}] 445 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}] 446 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}] 447 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}] 448 @end ifset 449 @ifset NIOSII 450 451 @emph{Target Nios II options:} 452 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}] 453 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}] 454 @end ifset 455 @ifset NDS32 456 457 @emph{Target NDS32 options:} 458 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] 459 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}] 460 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}] 461 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}] 462 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}] 463 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}] 464 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}] 465 [@b{-mb2bb}] 466 @end ifset 467 @ifset PDP11 468 469 @emph{Target PDP11 options:} 470 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}] 471 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}] 472 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}] 473 @end ifset 474 @ifset PJ 475 476 @emph{Target picoJava options:} 477 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}] 478 @end ifset 479 @ifset PPC 480 481 @emph{Target PowerPC options:} 482 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}] 483 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}| 484 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}| 485 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}| 486 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}| 487 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}| 488 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}] 489 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}] 490 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}] 491 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}] 492 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}] 493 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}] 494 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}] 495 @end ifset 496 @ifset RL78 497 498 @emph{Target RL78 options:} 499 [@b{-mg10}] 500 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}] 501 @end ifset 502 @ifset RX 503 504 @emph{Target RX options:} 505 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}] 506 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}] 507 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}] 508 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}] 509 [@b{-mpid}] 510 [@b{-mrelax}] 511 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}] 512 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}] 513 @end ifset 514 @ifset S390 515 516 @emph{Target s390 options:} 517 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] 518 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}] 519 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}] 520 @end ifset 521 @ifset SCORE 522 523 @emph{Target SCORE options:} 524 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}] 525 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}] 526 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}] 527 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}] 528 @end ifset 529 @ifset SPARC 530 531 @emph{Target SPARC options:} 532 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi. 533 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite} 534 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}] 535 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}] 536 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}] 537 @end ifset 538 @ifset TIC54X 539 540 @emph{Target TIC54X options:} 541 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}] 542 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}] 543 @end ifset 544 @ifset TIC6X 545 546 @emph{Target TIC6X options:} 547 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}] 548 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}] 549 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] 550 @end ifset 551 @ifset TILEGX 552 553 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:} 554 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}] 555 @end ifset 556 @ifset TILEPRO 557 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options 558 @end ifset 559 @ifset VISIUM 560 561 @emph{Target Visium options:} 562 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}] 563 @end ifset 564 @ifset XTENSA 565 566 @emph{Target Xtensa options:} 567 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}] 568 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}] 569 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}] 570 [@b{--[no-]transform}] 571 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}] 572 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}] 573 @end ifset 574 @ifset Z80 575 576 @emph{Target Z80 options:} 577 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}] 578 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}] 579 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}] 580 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}] 581 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}] 582 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}] 583 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}] 584 @end ifset 585 @ifset Z8000 586 587 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options 588 @end ifset 589 590 @c man end 591 @end smallexample 592 593 @c man begin OPTIONS 594 595 @table @gcctabopt 596 @include at-file.texi 597 598 @item -a[cdghlmns] 599 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways: 600 601 @table @gcctabopt 602 @item -ac 603 omit false conditionals 604 605 @item -ad 606 omit debugging directives 607 608 @item -ag 609 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed 610 611 @item -ah 612 include high-level source 613 614 @item -al 615 include assembly 616 617 @item -am 618 include macro expansions 619 620 @item -an 621 omit forms processing 622 623 @item -as 624 include symbols 625 626 @item =file 627 set the name of the listing file 628 @end table 629 630 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly 631 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be 632 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}. 633 634 @item --alternate 635 Begin in alternate macro mode. 636 @ifclear man 637 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}. 638 @end ifclear 639 640 @item --compress-debug-sections 641 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the 642 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older 643 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a 644 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed. 645 646 @ifset ELF 647 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option 648 @item --compress-debug-sections=none 649 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib 650 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu 651 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi 652 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed. 653 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to 654 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}. 655 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and 656 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to 657 @option{--compress-debug-sections}. 658 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug 659 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with 660 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section 661 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed. 662 663 @end ifset 664 665 @item --nocompress-debug-sections 666 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all 667 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to 668 override this. 669 670 @item -D 671 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to 672 other assemblers. 673 674 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new} 675 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging 676 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead. 677 678 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value} 679 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file. 680 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x} 681 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal 682 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the 683 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op. 684 685 @item -f 686 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is 687 compiler output). 688 689 @item -g 690 @itemx --gen-debug 691 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever 692 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS, 693 ECOFF or DWARF2. 694 695 @item --gstabs 696 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This 697 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. 698 699 @item --gstabs+ 700 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU 701 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other 702 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This 703 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is 704 the location of the current working directory at assembling time. 705 706 @item --gdwarf-2 707 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This 708 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this 709 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them. 710 711 @item --gdwarf-sections 712 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of 713 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the 714 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func} 715 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called 716 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text} 717 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any 718 suffix. 719 720 @ifset ELF 721 @item --size-check=error 722 @itemx --size-check=warning 723 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive. 724 725 @item --elf-stt-common=no 726 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes 727 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common 728 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled 729 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}. 730 @end ifset 731 732 @item --help 733 Print a summary of the command line options and exit. 734 735 @item --target-help 736 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit. 737 738 @item -I @var{dir} 739 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives. 740 741 @item -J 742 Don't warn about signed overflow. 743 744 @item -K 745 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 746 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family. 747 @end ifclear 748 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 749 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements. 750 @end ifset 751 752 @item -L 753 @itemx --keep-locals 754 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with 755 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems 756 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems. 757 @ifclear man 758 @xref{Symbol Names}. 759 @end ifclear 760 761 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number} 762 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler 763 listing to @var{number}. 764 765 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number} 766 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation 767 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}. 768 769 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number} 770 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to 771 @var{number} bytes. 772 773 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number} 774 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input 775 to @var{number} + 1. 776 777 @item --no-pad-sections 778 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment 779 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space 780 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints. 781 782 @item -o @var{objfile} 783 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}. 784 785 @item -R 786 Fold the data section into the text section. 787 788 @item --hash-size=@var{number} 789 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to 790 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the 791 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's 792 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory 793 requirements at the expense of speed. 794 795 @item --reduce-memory-overheads 796 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the 797 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for 798 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well. 799 800 @ifset ELF 801 @item --sectname-subst 802 Honor substitution sequences in section names. 803 @ifclear man 804 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}. 805 @end ifclear 806 @end ifset 807 808 @item --statistics 809 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by 810 assembly. 811 812 @item --strip-local-absolute 813 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table. 814 815 @item -v 816 @itemx -version 817 Print the @command{as} version. 818 819 @item --version 820 Print the @command{as} version and exit. 821 822 @item -W 823 @itemx --no-warn 824 Suppress warning messages. 825 826 @item --fatal-warnings 827 Treat warnings as errors. 828 829 @item --warn 830 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors. 831 832 @item -w 833 Ignored. 834 835 @item -x 836 Ignored. 837 838 @item -Z 839 Generate an object file even after errors. 840 841 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{} 842 Standard input, or source files to assemble. 843 844 @end table 845 @c man end 846 847 @ifset AARCH64 848 849 @ifclear man 850 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 851 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64). 852 @end ifclear 853 854 @ifset man 855 @c man begin OPTIONS 856 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 857 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64). 858 @c man end 859 @c man begin INCLUDE 860 @include c-aarch64.texi 861 @c ended inside the included file 862 @end ifset 863 864 @end ifset 865 866 @ifset ALPHA 867 868 @ifclear man 869 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 870 for an Alpha processor. 871 @end ifclear 872 873 @ifset man 874 @c man begin OPTIONS 875 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha 876 processor. 877 @c man end 878 @c man begin INCLUDE 879 @include c-alpha.texi 880 @c ended inside the included file 881 @end ifset 882 883 @end ifset 884 885 @c man begin OPTIONS 886 @ifset ARC 887 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC 888 processor. 889 890 @table @gcctabopt 891 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu} 892 This option selects the core processor variant. 893 @item -EB | -EL 894 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output. 895 @item -mcode-density 896 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions. 897 @end table 898 @end ifset 899 900 @ifset ARM 901 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM 902 processor family. 903 904 @table @gcctabopt 905 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}] 906 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target. 907 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}] 908 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target. 909 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format} 910 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target. 911 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi} 912 Select which floating point ABI is in use. 913 @item -mthumb 914 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding. 915 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant 916 Select which procedure calling convention is in use. 917 @item -EB | -EL 918 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output. 919 @item -mthumb-interwork 920 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and 921 ARM code in mind. 922 @item -mccs 923 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode. 924 @item -k 925 Specify that PIC code has been generated. 926 @end table 927 @end ifset 928 @c man end 929 930 @ifset Blackfin 931 932 @ifclear man 933 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is 934 configured for the Blackfin processor family. 935 @end ifclear 936 937 @ifset man 938 @c man begin OPTIONS 939 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 940 the Blackfin processor family. 941 @c man end 942 @c man begin INCLUDE 943 @include c-bfin.texi 944 @c ended inside the included file 945 @end ifset 946 947 @end ifset 948 949 @c man begin OPTIONS 950 @ifset CRIS 951 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options. 952 @end ifset 953 954 @ifset D10V 955 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 956 a D10V processor. 957 @table @gcctabopt 958 @cindex D10V optimization 959 @cindex optimization, D10V 960 @item -O 961 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions. 962 @end table 963 @end ifset 964 965 @ifset D30V 966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V 967 processor. 968 @table @gcctabopt 969 @cindex D30V optimization 970 @cindex optimization, D30V 971 @item -O 972 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions. 973 974 @cindex D30V nops 975 @item -n 976 Warn when nops are generated. 977 978 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply 979 @item -N 980 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated. 981 @end table 982 @end ifset 983 @c man end 984 985 @ifset EPIPHANY 986 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 987 Adapteva EPIPHANY series. 988 989 @ifclear man 990 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is 991 configured for an Epiphany processor. 992 @end ifclear 993 994 @ifset man 995 @c man begin OPTIONS 996 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 997 an Epiphany processor. 998 @c man end 999 @c man begin INCLUDE 1000 @include c-epiphany.texi 1001 @c ended inside the included file 1002 @end ifset 1003 1004 @end ifset 1005 1006 @ifset H8300 1007 1008 @ifclear man 1009 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1010 for an H8/300 processor. 1011 @end ifclear 1012 1013 @ifset man 1014 @c man begin OPTIONS 1015 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300 1016 processor. 1017 @c man end 1018 @c man begin INCLUDE 1019 @include c-h8300.texi 1020 @c ended inside the included file 1021 @end ifset 1022 1023 @end ifset 1024 1025 @ifset I80386 1026 1027 @ifclear man 1028 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is 1029 configured for an i386 processor. 1030 @end ifclear 1031 1032 @ifset man 1033 @c man begin OPTIONS 1034 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1035 an i386 processor. 1036 @c man end 1037 @c man begin INCLUDE 1038 @include c-i386.texi 1039 @c ended inside the included file 1040 @end ifset 1041 1042 @end ifset 1043 1044 @c man begin OPTIONS 1045 @ifset I960 1046 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1047 Intel 80960 processor. 1048 1049 @table @gcctabopt 1050 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC 1051 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target. 1052 1053 @item -b 1054 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken. 1055 1056 @item -no-relax 1057 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements; 1058 error if necessary. 1059 1060 @end table 1061 @end ifset 1062 1063 @ifset IP2K 1064 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1065 Ubicom IP2K series. 1066 1067 @table @gcctabopt 1068 1069 @item -mip2022ext 1070 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed. 1071 1072 @item -mip2022 1073 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to 1074 just the basic IP2022 ones. 1075 1076 @end table 1077 @end ifset 1078 1079 @ifset M32C 1080 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1081 Renesas M32C and M16C processors. 1082 1083 @table @gcctabopt 1084 1085 @item -m32c 1086 Assemble M32C instructions. 1087 1088 @item -m16c 1089 Assemble M16C instructions (the default). 1090 1091 @item -relax 1092 Enable support for link-time relaxations. 1093 1094 @item -h-tick-hex 1095 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style. 1096 1097 @end table 1098 @end ifset 1099 1100 @ifset M32R 1101 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1102 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series. 1103 1104 @table @gcctabopt 1105 1106 @item --m32rx 1107 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default 1108 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX. 1109 1110 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp 1111 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are 1112 encountered. 1113 1114 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp 1115 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are 1116 encountered. 1117 1118 @end table 1119 @end ifset 1120 1121 @ifset M680X0 1122 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1123 Motorola 68000 series. 1124 1125 @table @gcctabopt 1126 1127 @item -l 1128 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two. 1129 1130 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030 1131 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332 1132 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200 1133 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default 1134 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time. 1135 1136 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882 1137 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor. 1138 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although 1139 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the 1140 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the 1141 coprocessor instructions with the main processor. 1142 1143 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851 1144 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management 1145 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up. 1146 1147 @end table 1148 @end ifset 1149 1150 @ifset NIOSII 1151 1152 @ifclear man 1153 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1154 for an Altera Nios II processor. 1155 @end ifclear 1156 1157 @ifset man 1158 @c man begin OPTIONS 1159 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an 1160 Altera Nios II processor. 1161 @c man end 1162 @c man begin INCLUDE 1163 @include c-nios2.texi 1164 @c ended inside the included file 1165 @end ifset 1166 @end ifset 1167 1168 @ifset PDP11 1169 1170 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options, 1171 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}. 1172 1173 @table @gcctabopt 1174 @item -mpic | -mno-pic 1175 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The 1176 default is @option{-mpic}. 1177 1178 @item -mall 1179 @itemx -mall-extensions 1180 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default. 1181 1182 @item -mno-extensions 1183 Disable all instruction set extensions. 1184 1185 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension} 1186 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension. 1187 1188 @item -m@var{cpu} 1189 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and 1190 disable all other extensions. 1191 1192 @item -m@var{machine} 1193 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine 1194 model, and disable all other extensions. 1195 @end table 1196 1197 @end ifset 1198 1199 @ifset PJ 1200 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1201 a picoJava processor. 1202 1203 @table @gcctabopt 1204 1205 @cindex PJ endianness 1206 @cindex endianness, PJ 1207 @cindex big endian output, PJ 1208 @item -mb 1209 Generate ``big endian'' format output. 1210 1211 @cindex little endian output, PJ 1212 @item -ml 1213 Generate ``little endian'' format output. 1214 1215 @end table 1216 @end ifset 1217 1218 @ifset M68HC11 1219 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1220 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series. 1221 1222 @table @gcctabopt 1223 1224 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg 1225 Specify what processor is the target. The default is 1226 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler. 1227 1228 @item --xgate-ramoffset 1229 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into 1230 XGATE address space. 1231 1232 @item -mshort 1233 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI. 1234 1235 @item -mlong 1236 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI. 1237 1238 @item -mshort-double 1239 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI. 1240 1241 @item -mlong-double 1242 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI. 1243 1244 @item --force-long-branches 1245 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns 1246 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a 1247 sub routine. 1248 1249 @item -S | --short-branches 1250 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones 1251 when the offset is out of range. 1252 1253 @item --strict-direct-mode 1254 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode 1255 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode. 1256 1257 @item --print-insn-syntax 1258 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error. 1259 1260 @item --print-opcodes 1261 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit. 1262 1263 @item --generate-example 1264 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit. 1265 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}. 1266 1267 @end table 1268 @end ifset 1269 1270 @ifset SPARC 1271 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured 1272 for the SPARC architecture: 1273 1274 @table @gcctabopt 1275 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite 1276 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a 1277 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture. 1278 1279 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment. 1280 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment. 1281 1282 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with 1283 UltraSPARC extensions. 1284 1285 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa 1286 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are 1287 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively. 1288 1289 @item -bump 1290 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture. 1291 @end table 1292 @end ifset 1293 1294 @ifset TIC54X 1295 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x 1296 architecture. 1297 1298 @table @gcctabopt 1299 @item -mfar-mode 1300 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume 1301 extended addressing (usually 23 bits). 1302 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION} 1303 Sets the CPU version being compiled for. 1304 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME} 1305 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such 1306 behaviour in the shell. 1307 @end table 1308 @end ifset 1309 1310 @ifset MIPS 1311 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1312 a MIPS processor. 1313 1314 @table @gcctabopt 1315 @item -G @var{num} 1316 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced 1317 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that 1318 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8. 1319 1320 @cindex MIPS endianness 1321 @cindex endianness, MIPS 1322 @cindex big endian output, MIPS 1323 @item -EB 1324 Generate ``big endian'' format output. 1325 1326 @cindex little endian output, MIPS 1327 @item -EL 1328 Generate ``little endian'' format output. 1329 1330 @cindex MIPS ISA 1331 @item -mips1 1332 @itemx -mips2 1333 @itemx -mips3 1334 @itemx -mips4 1335 @itemx -mips5 1336 @itemx -mips32 1337 @itemx -mips32r2 1338 @itemx -mips32r3 1339 @itemx -mips32r5 1340 @itemx -mips32r6 1341 @itemx -mips64 1342 @itemx -mips64r2 1343 @itemx -mips64r3 1344 @itemx -mips64r5 1345 @itemx -mips64r6 1346 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level. 1347 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an 1348 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for 1349 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}. 1350 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3}, 1351 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2}, 1352 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic 1353 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32 1354 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and 1355 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively. 1356 1357 @item -march=@var{cpu} 1358 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU. 1359 1360 @item -mtune=@var{cpu} 1361 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU. 1362 1363 @item -mfix7000 1364 @itemx -mno-fix7000 1365 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register 1366 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions. 1367 1368 @item -mfix-rm7000 1369 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000 1370 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is 1371 followed by a load instruction. 1372 1373 @item -mdebug 1374 @itemx -no-mdebug 1375 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug 1376 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections. 1377 1378 @item -mpdr 1379 @itemx -mno-pdr 1380 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections. 1381 1382 @item -mgp32 1383 @itemx -mfp32 1384 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these 1385 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at 1386 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers 1387 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers. 1388 1389 @item -mgp64 1390 @itemx -mfp64 1391 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these 1392 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at 1393 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers 1394 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers. 1395 1396 @item -mfpxx 1397 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using 1398 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant 1399 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are 1400 32 or 64 bits wide. 1401 1402 @item -modd-spreg 1403 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg 1404 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision 1405 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies 1406 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}. 1407 1408 @item -mips16 1409 @itemx -no-mips16 1410 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting 1411 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16} 1412 turns off this option. 1413 1414 @item -mmicromips 1415 @itemx -mno-micromips 1416 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting 1417 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips} 1418 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips} 1419 at the start of the assembly file. 1420 1421 @item -msmartmips 1422 @itemx -mno-smartmips 1423 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is 1424 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file. 1425 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option. 1426 1427 @item -mips3d 1428 @itemx -no-mips3d 1429 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension. 1430 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions. 1431 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option. 1432 1433 @item -mdmx 1434 @itemx -no-mdmx 1435 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension. 1436 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions. 1437 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option. 1438 1439 @item -mdsp 1440 @itemx -mno-dsp 1441 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension. 1442 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions. 1443 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option. 1444 1445 @item -mdspr2 1446 @itemx -mno-dspr2 1447 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension. 1448 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}. 1449 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions. 1450 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option. 1451 1452 @item -mdspr3 1453 @itemx -mno-dspr3 1454 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension. 1455 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}. 1456 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions. 1457 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option. 1458 1459 @item -mmsa 1460 @itemx -mno-msa 1461 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension. 1462 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions. 1463 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option. 1464 1465 @item -mxpa 1466 @itemx -mno-xpa 1467 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension. 1468 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions. 1469 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option. 1470 1471 @item -mmt 1472 @itemx -mno-mt 1473 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension. 1474 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions. 1475 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option. 1476 1477 @item -mmcu 1478 @itemx -mno-mcu 1479 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension. 1480 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions. 1481 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option. 1482 1483 @item -minsn32 1484 @itemx -mno-insn32 1485 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the 1486 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit 1487 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at 1488 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this 1489 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the 1490 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is 1491 selected, allowing all instructions to be used. 1492 1493 @item --construct-floats 1494 @itemx --no-construct-floats 1495 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of 1496 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the 1497 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up 1498 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is 1499 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants. 1500 1501 @item --relax-branch 1502 @itemx --no-relax-branch 1503 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range 1504 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any 1505 out-of-range branches to produce an error. 1506 1507 @item -mnan=@var{encoding} 1508 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy 1509 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default. 1510 1511 @cindex emulation 1512 @item --emulation=@var{name} 1513 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output 1514 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was 1515 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose. 1516 It is retained for backwards compatibility. 1517 1518 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and 1519 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output 1520 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and 1521 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the 1522 preferred options instead. 1523 1524 @item -nocpp 1525 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with 1526 the native tools. 1527 1528 @item --trap 1529 @itemx --no-trap 1530 @itemx --break 1531 @itemx --no-break 1532 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero. 1533 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception 1534 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher); 1535 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a 1536 break exception. 1537 1538 @item -n 1539 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every 1540 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro. 1541 @end table 1542 @end ifset 1543 1544 @ifset MCORE 1545 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1546 an MCore processor. 1547 1548 @table @gcctabopt 1549 @item -jsri2bsr 1550 @itemx -nojsri2bsr 1551 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled. 1552 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it. 1553 1554 @item -sifilter 1555 @itemx -nosifilter 1556 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled. 1557 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option. 1558 1559 @item -relax 1560 Alter jump instructions for long displacements. 1561 1562 @item -mcpu=[210|340] 1563 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions 1564 can be assembled. 1565 1566 @item -EB 1567 Assemble for a big endian target. 1568 1569 @item -EL 1570 Assemble for a little endian target. 1571 1572 @end table 1573 @end ifset 1574 @c man end 1575 1576 @ifset METAG 1577 1578 @ifclear man 1579 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1580 for a Meta processor. 1581 @end ifclear 1582 1583 @ifset man 1584 @c man begin OPTIONS 1585 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1586 Meta processor. 1587 @c man end 1588 @c man begin INCLUDE 1589 @include c-metag.texi 1590 @c ended inside the included file 1591 @end ifset 1592 1593 @end ifset 1594 1595 @c man begin OPTIONS 1596 @ifset MMIX 1597 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options. 1598 @end ifset 1599 1600 @ifset NDS32 1601 1602 @ifclear man 1603 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1604 for a NDS32 processor. 1605 @end ifclear 1606 @c ended inside the included file 1607 @end ifset 1608 1609 @ifset man 1610 @c man begin OPTIONS 1611 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1612 NDS32 processor. 1613 @c man end 1614 @c man begin INCLUDE 1615 @include c-nds32.texi 1616 @c ended inside the included file 1617 @end ifset 1618 1619 @c man end 1620 @ifset PPC 1621 1622 @ifclear man 1623 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1624 for a PowerPC processor. 1625 @end ifclear 1626 1627 @ifset man 1628 @c man begin OPTIONS 1629 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1630 PowerPC processor. 1631 @c man end 1632 @c man begin INCLUDE 1633 @include c-ppc.texi 1634 @c ended inside the included file 1635 @end ifset 1636 1637 @end ifset 1638 1639 @c man begin OPTIONS 1640 @ifset RX 1641 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options. 1642 @end ifset 1643 1644 @ifset S390 1645 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390 1646 processor family. 1647 1648 @table @gcctabopt 1649 @item -m31 1650 @itemx -m64 1651 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits. 1652 @item -mesa 1653 @item -mzarch 1654 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System 1655 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch). 1656 @item -march=@var{processor} 1657 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6}, 1658 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10}, 1659 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}. 1660 @item -mregnames 1661 @itemx -mno-regnames 1662 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers. 1663 @item -mwarn-areg-zero 1664 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified 1665 but evaluates to zero. 1666 @end table 1667 @end ifset 1668 @c man end 1669 1670 @ifset TIC6X 1671 1672 @ifclear man 1673 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1674 for a TMS320C6000 processor. 1675 @end ifclear 1676 1677 @ifset man 1678 @c man begin OPTIONS 1679 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1680 TMS320C6000 processor. 1681 @c man end 1682 @c man begin INCLUDE 1683 @include c-tic6x.texi 1684 @c ended inside the included file 1685 @end ifset 1686 1687 @end ifset 1688 1689 @ifset TILEGX 1690 1691 @ifclear man 1692 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1693 for a TILE-Gx processor. 1694 @end ifclear 1695 1696 @ifset man 1697 @c man begin OPTIONS 1698 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx 1699 processor. 1700 @c man end 1701 @c man begin INCLUDE 1702 @include c-tilegx.texi 1703 @c ended inside the included file 1704 @end ifset 1705 1706 @end ifset 1707 1708 @ifset VISIUM 1709 1710 @ifclear man 1711 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1712 for a Visium processor. 1713 @end ifclear 1714 1715 @ifset man 1716 @c man begin OPTIONS 1717 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium 1718 processor. 1719 @c man end 1720 @c man begin INCLUDE 1721 @include c-visium.texi 1722 @c ended inside the included file 1723 @end ifset 1724 1725 @end ifset 1726 1727 @ifset XTENSA 1728 1729 @ifclear man 1730 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1731 for an Xtensa processor. 1732 @end ifclear 1733 1734 @ifset man 1735 @c man begin OPTIONS 1736 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an 1737 Xtensa processor. 1738 @c man end 1739 @c man begin INCLUDE 1740 @include c-xtensa.texi 1741 @c ended inside the included file 1742 @end ifset 1743 1744 @end ifset 1745 1746 @c man begin OPTIONS 1747 1748 @ifset Z80 1749 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1750 a Z80 family processor. 1751 @table @gcctabopt 1752 @item -z80 1753 Assemble for Z80 processor. 1754 @item -r800 1755 Assemble for R800 processor. 1756 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions 1757 @itemx -Wnud 1758 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning. 1759 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions 1760 @itemx -Wnup 1761 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning. 1762 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions 1763 @itemx -Wud 1764 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800. 1765 @item -warn-unportable-instructions 1766 @itemx -Wup 1767 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800. 1768 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions 1769 @itemx -Fud 1770 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors. 1771 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions 1772 @itemx -Fup 1773 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors. 1774 @end table 1775 @end ifset 1776 1777 @c man end 1778 1779 @menu 1780 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual 1781 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler 1782 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats 1783 * Command Line:: Command Line 1784 * Input Files:: Input Files 1785 * Object:: Output (Object) File 1786 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages 1787 @end menu 1788 1789 @node Manual 1790 @section Structure of this Manual 1791 1792 @cindex manual, structure and purpose 1793 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use 1794 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including 1795 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that 1796 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. 1797 1798 @ifclear GENERIC 1799 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET} 1800 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives. 1801 @end ifclear 1802 @ifset GENERIC 1803 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of 1804 various flavors of the assembler. 1805 @end ifset 1806 1807 @cindex machine instructions (not covered) 1808 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction 1809 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general! 1810 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine 1811 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard 1812 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a 1813 particular architecture. 1814 @ifset GENERIC 1815 You may want to consult the manufacturer's 1816 machine architecture manual for this information. 1817 @end ifset 1818 @ifclear GENERIC 1819 @ifset H8/300 1820 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300 1821 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series 1822 Programming Manual} (Renesas). 1823 @end ifset 1824 @ifset SH 1825 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set, 1826 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or 1827 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and 1828 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH). 1829 @end ifset 1830 @ifset Z8000 1831 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual} 1832 @end ifset 1833 @end ifclear 1834 1835 @c I think this is premature---doc (a] cygnus.com, 17jan1991 1836 @ignore 1837 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU}, 1838 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software 1839 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of 1840 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on); 1841 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less 1842 qualification. 1843 1844 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level 1845 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level 1846 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of 1847 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer. 1848 @end ignore 1849 1850 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined 1851 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any 1852 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16 1853 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user 1854 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define. 1855 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual; 1856 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of 1857 @c directives). 1858 1859 @node GNU Assembler 1860 @section The GNU Assembler 1861 1862 @c man begin DESCRIPTION 1863 1864 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers. 1865 @ifclear GENERIC 1866 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is 1867 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures. 1868 @end ifclear 1869 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you 1870 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another 1871 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others, 1872 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called 1873 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill 1874 1875 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler 1876 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the 1877 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker 1878 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}} 1879 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same 1880 machine would assemble. 1881 @ifset VAX 1882 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}). 1883 @end ifset 1884 @ifset M680X0 1885 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption 1886 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0. 1887 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another 1888 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several 1889 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax. 1890 @end ifset 1891 1892 @c man end 1893 1894 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source 1895 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the 1896 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}). 1897 1898 @node Object Formats 1899 @section Object File Formats 1900 1901 @cindex object file format 1902 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative 1903 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you 1904 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols 1905 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol 1906 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}. 1907 @ifclear GENERIC 1908 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ 1909 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce 1910 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files. 1911 @end ifclear 1912 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally 1913 @ifset I960 1914 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either 1915 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files. 1916 @end ifset 1917 @ifset HPPA 1918 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either 1919 SOM or ELF format object files. 1920 @end ifset 1921 @end ifclear 1922 1923 @node Command Line 1924 @section Command Line 1925 1926 @cindex command line conventions 1927 1928 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain 1929 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be 1930 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is 1931 significant. 1932 1933 @cindex standard input, as input file 1934 @kindex -- 1935 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file 1936 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble. 1937 1938 @cindex options, command line 1939 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a 1940 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of 1941 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An 1942 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of 1943 the letter is important. All options are optional. 1944 1945 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file 1946 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible 1947 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu} 1948 standard). These two command lines are equivalent: 1949 1950 @smallexample 1951 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s 1952 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s 1953 @end smallexample 1954 1955 @node Input Files 1956 @section Input Files 1957 1958 @cindex input 1959 @cindex source program 1960 @cindex files, input 1961 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to 1962 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may 1963 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files 1964 doesn't change the meaning of the source. 1965 1966 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my 1967 @c APL training... doc (a] cygnus.com 1968 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the 1969 order specified. 1970 1971 @c man begin DESCRIPTION 1972 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source 1973 program. The source program is made up of one or more files. 1974 (The standard input is also a file.) 1975 1976 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file 1977 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A 1978 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning 1979 is taken to be an input file name. 1980 1981 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file 1982 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You 1983 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program 1984 to assemble. 1985 1986 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file 1987 in your command line. 1988 1989 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object 1990 file. 1991 1992 @c man end 1993 1994 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers 1995 1996 @cindex input file linenumbers 1997 @cindex line numbers, in input files 1998 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and 1999 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line 2000 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a 2001 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}. 2002 2003 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given 2004 to @command{@value{AS}}. 2005 2006 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler 2007 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help 2008 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source 2009 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the 2010 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also 2011 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}. 2012 2013 @node Object 2014 @section Output (Object) File 2015 2016 @cindex object file 2017 @cindex output file 2018 @kindex a.out 2019 @kindex .o 2020 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is 2021 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file 2022 is the object file. Its default name is 2023 @ifclear BOUT 2024 @code{a.out}. 2025 @end ifclear 2026 @ifset BOUT 2027 @ifset GENERIC 2028 @code{a.out}, or 2029 @end ifset 2030 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960. 2031 @end ifset 2032 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally, 2033 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical 2034 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs 2035 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently 2036 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.) 2037 2038 @cindex linker 2039 @kindex ld 2040 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains 2041 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate 2042 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic 2043 information for the debugger. 2044 2045 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out. 2046 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage. 2047 2048 @node Errors 2049 @section Error and Warning Messages 2050 2051 @c man begin DESCRIPTION 2052 2053 @cindex error messages 2054 @cindex warning messages 2055 @cindex messages from assembler 2056 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error 2057 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler 2058 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so 2059 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a 2060 grave problem that stops the assembly. 2061 2062 @c man end 2063 2064 @cindex format of warning messages 2065 Warning messages have the format 2066 2067 @smallexample 2068 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text 2069 @end smallexample 2070 2071 @noindent 2072 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors 2073 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name 2074 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number 2075 @ifset GENERIC 2076 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}}) 2077 @end ifset 2078 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number 2079 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is 2080 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition). 2081 2082 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file} 2083 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example: 2084 2085 @smallexample 2086 .file 2 "bar.c" 2087 error_assembler_source 2088 .file "foo.c" 2089 .line 30 2090 error_c_source 2091 @end smallexample 2092 2093 produces this output: 2094 2095 @smallexample 2096 Assembler messages: 2097 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source' 2098 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source' 2099 @end smallexample 2100 2101 @cindex format of error messages 2102 Error messages have the format 2103 2104 @smallexample 2105 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text 2106 @end smallexample 2107 2108 The file name and line number are derived as for warning 2109 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory 2110 because many of them aren't supposed to happen. 2111 2112 @node Invoking 2113 @chapter Command-Line Options 2114 2115 @cindex options, all versions of assembler 2116 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all} 2117 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies}, 2118 for options specific 2119 @ifclear GENERIC 2120 to the @value{TARGET} target. 2121 @end ifclear 2122 @ifset GENERIC 2123 to particular machine architectures. 2124 @end ifset 2125 2126 @c man begin DESCRIPTION 2127 2128 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler, 2129 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler. 2130 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa}) 2131 by commas. For example: 2132 2133 @smallexample 2134 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c 2135 @end smallexample 2136 2137 @noindent 2138 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to 2139 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain 2140 local symbols in the symbol table). 2141 2142 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler 2143 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler. 2144 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see 2145 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the 2146 assembler.) 2147 2148 @c man end 2149 2150 @menu 2151 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings 2152 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax 2153 * D:: -D for compatibility 2154 * f:: -f to work faster 2155 * I:: -I for .include search path 2156 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2157 * K:: -K for compatibility 2158 @end ifclear 2159 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2160 * K:: -K for difference tables 2161 @end ifset 2162 2163 * L:: -L to retain local symbols 2164 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output 2165 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode 2166 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking 2167 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding 2168 * o:: -o to name the object file 2169 * R:: -R to join data and text sections 2170 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly 2171 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output 2172 * v:: -v to announce version 2173 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings 2174 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors 2175 @end menu 2176 2177 @node a 2178 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]} 2179 2180 @kindex -a 2181 @kindex -ac 2182 @kindex -ad 2183 @kindex -ag 2184 @kindex -ah 2185 @kindex -al 2186 @kindex -an 2187 @kindex -as 2188 @cindex listings, enabling 2189 @cindex assembly listings, enabling 2190 2191 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself, 2192 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing. 2193 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list: 2194 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing, 2195 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and 2196 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing. 2197 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like 2198 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested 2199 also. 2200 2201 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly 2202 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp. 2203 2204 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines 2205 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any 2206 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be 2207 omitted from the listing. 2208 2209 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the 2210 listing. 2211 2212 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control 2213 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list}, 2214 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and 2215 @code{.sbttl}. 2216 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing. 2217 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the 2218 listing-control directives have no effect. 2219 2220 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option, 2221 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}. 2222 2223 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g., 2224 because it 2225 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch 2226 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor 2227 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from 2228 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces 2229 memory usage and makes the code more efficient. 2230 2231 @node alternate 2232 @section @option{--alternate} 2233 2234 @kindex --alternate 2235 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}. 2236 2237 @node D 2238 @section @option{-D} 2239 2240 @kindex -D 2241 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more 2242 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with 2243 @command{@value{AS}}. 2244 2245 @node f 2246 @section Work Faster: @option{-f} 2247 2248 @kindex -f 2249 @cindex trusted compiler 2250 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f}) 2251 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a 2252 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace 2253 and comment preprocessing on 2254 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing, 2255 ,Preprocessing}. 2256 2257 @quotation 2258 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be 2259 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does 2260 not work correctly. 2261 @end quotation 2262 2263 @node I 2264 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path} 2265 2266 @kindex -I @var{path} 2267 @cindex paths for @code{.include} 2268 @cindex search path for @code{.include} 2269 @cindex @code{include} directive search path 2270 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories 2271 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include} 2272 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as 2273 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current 2274 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}} 2275 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were 2276 specified (left to right) on the command line. 2277 2278 @node K 2279 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K} 2280 2281 @kindex -K 2282 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2283 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is 2284 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms, 2285 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code 2286 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET} 2287 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this 2288 alteration on other platforms. 2289 @end ifclear 2290 2291 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2292 @cindex difference tables, warning 2293 @cindex warning for altered difference tables 2294 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the 2295 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. 2296 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this 2297 is done. 2298 @end ifset 2299 2300 @node L 2301 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L} 2302 2303 @kindex -L 2304 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output 2305 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically 2306 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are 2307 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see 2308 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of 2309 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your 2310 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard 2311 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them. 2312 2313 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols 2314 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker 2315 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols. 2316 2317 @node listing 2318 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing} 2319 2320 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch 2321 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a 2322 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays 2323 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by 2324 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}), 2325 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}), 2326 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and 2327 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches: 2328 2329 @table @gcctabopt 2330 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number} 2331 @kindex --listing-lhs-width 2332 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output 2333 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This 2334 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output. 2335 2336 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number} 2337 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2 2338 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output 2339 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for 2340 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being 2341 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither 2342 switch is used the default is to one. 2343 2344 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number} 2345 @kindex --listing-rhs-width 2346 @cindex Width of source line output 2347 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed 2348 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The 2349 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output. 2350 2351 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number} 2352 @kindex --listing-cont-lines 2353 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines 2354 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be 2355 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4. 2356 @end table 2357 2358 @node M 2359 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M} 2360 2361 @kindex -M 2362 @cindex MRI compatibility mode 2363 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This 2364 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it 2365 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the 2366 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the 2367 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more 2368 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro 2369 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit 2370 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}. 2371 2372 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler 2373 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object 2374 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format 2375 individually. These are: 2376 2377 @itemize @bullet 2378 @item global symbols in common section 2379 2380 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker. 2381 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles 2382 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local 2383 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global 2384 symbols, since it has no way to describe them. 2385 2386 @item complex relocations 2387 2388 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and 2389 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These 2390 are not support by other object file formats. 2391 2392 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address 2393 2394 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address. 2395 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may 2396 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker 2397 script. 2398 2399 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops 2400 2401 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module 2402 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats. 2403 2404 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op 2405 2406 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given 2407 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op, 2408 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are 2409 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be 2410 assigned within a linker script. 2411 @end itemize 2412 2413 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by 2414 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they 2415 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases. 2416 2417 @itemize @bullet 2418 2419 @item EBCDIC strings 2420 2421 EBCDIC strings are not supported. 2422 2423 @item packed binary coded decimal 2424 2425 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P} 2426 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported. 2427 2428 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op 2429 2430 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported. 2431 2432 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op 2433 2434 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported. 2435 2436 @item @code{OPT} branch control options 2437 2438 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB}, 2439 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically 2440 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so 2441 these options serve no purpose. 2442 2443 @item @code{OPT} list control options 2444 2445 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C}, 2446 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M}, 2447 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}. 2448 2449 @item other @code{OPT} options 2450 2451 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O}, 2452 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}. 2453 2454 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default 2455 2456 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler. 2457 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off. 2458 2459 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op. 2460 2461 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored. 2462 2463 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op 2464 2465 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported. 2466 2467 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op 2468 2469 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported. 2470 2471 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op. 2472 2473 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported. 2474 2475 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op 2476 2477 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported. 2478 2479 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op 2480 2481 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported. 2482 2483 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op 2484 2485 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported. 2486 2487 @end itemize 2488 2489 @node MD 2490 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD} 2491 2492 @kindex --MD 2493 @cindex dependency tracking 2494 @cindex make rules 2495 2496 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This 2497 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the 2498 dependencies of the main source file. 2499 2500 The rule is written to the file named in its argument. 2501 2502 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles. 2503 2504 @node no-pad-sections 2505 @section Output Section Padding 2506 @kindex --no-pad-sections 2507 @cindex output section padding 2508 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its 2509 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on 2510 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will 2511 disable this behaviour. 2512 2513 @node o 2514 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o} 2515 2516 @kindex -o 2517 @cindex naming object file 2518 @cindex object file name 2519 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By 2520 default it has the name 2521 @ifset GENERIC 2522 @ifset I960 2523 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only). 2524 @end ifset 2525 @ifclear I960 2526 @file{a.out}. 2527 @end ifclear 2528 @end ifset 2529 @ifclear GENERIC 2530 @ifset I960 2531 @file{b.out}. 2532 @end ifset 2533 @ifclear I960 2534 @file{a.out}. 2535 @end ifclear 2536 @end ifclear 2537 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the 2538 object file a different name. 2539 2540 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any 2541 existing file of the same name. 2542 2543 @node R 2544 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R} 2545 2546 @kindex -R 2547 @cindex data and text sections, joining 2548 @cindex text and data sections, joining 2549 @cindex joining text and data sections 2550 @cindex merging text and data sections 2551 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all 2552 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at 2553 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data 2554 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of 2555 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are 2556 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.) 2557 2558 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter 2559 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and 2560 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with 2561 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way. 2562 2563 @ifset COFF-ELF 2564 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output, 2565 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and 2566 @samp{.data}. 2567 @end ifset 2568 2569 @ifset HPPA 2570 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using 2571 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}. 2572 @end ifset 2573 2574 @node statistics 2575 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics} 2576 2577 @kindex --statistics 2578 @cindex statistics, about assembly 2579 @cindex time, total for assembly 2580 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly 2581 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by 2582 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly 2583 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu} 2584 seconds). 2585 2586 @node traditional-format 2587 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format} 2588 2589 @kindex --traditional-format 2590 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways 2591 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests 2592 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead. 2593 2594 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which 2595 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output. 2596 2597 @node v 2598 @section Announce Version: @option{-v} 2599 2600 @kindex -v 2601 @kindex -version 2602 @cindex assembler version 2603 @cindex version of assembler 2604 You can find out what version of as is running by including the 2605 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the 2606 command line. 2607 2608 @node W 2609 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings} 2610 2611 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when 2612 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often 2613 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was 2614 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file. 2615 2616 @kindex -W 2617 @kindex --no-warn 2618 @cindex suppressing warnings 2619 @cindex warnings, suppressing 2620 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued. 2621 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of 2622 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly, 2623 are still reported. 2624 2625 @kindex --fatal-warnings 2626 @cindex errors, caused by warnings 2627 @cindex warnings, causing error 2628 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers 2629 files that generate warnings to be in error. 2630 2631 @kindex --warn 2632 @cindex warnings, switching on 2633 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which 2634 causes warnings to be output as usual. 2635 2636 @node Z 2637 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z} 2638 @cindex object file, after errors 2639 @cindex errors, continuing after 2640 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for 2641 some reason you are interested in object file output even after 2642 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z} 2643 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and 2644 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n} 2645 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.} 2646 2647 @node Syntax 2648 @chapter Syntax 2649 2650 @cindex machine-independent syntax 2651 @cindex syntax, machine-independent 2652 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a 2653 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other 2654 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2 2655 @ifclear VAX 2656 assembler. 2657 @end ifclear 2658 @ifset VAX 2659 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields. 2660 @end ifset 2661 2662 @menu 2663 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing 2664 * Whitespace:: Whitespace 2665 * Comments:: Comments 2666 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols 2667 * Statements:: Statements 2668 * Constants:: Constants 2669 @end menu 2670 2671 @node Preprocessing 2672 @section Preprocessing 2673 2674 @cindex preprocessing 2675 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor: 2676 @itemize @bullet 2677 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor 2678 @item 2679 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before 2680 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into 2681 a single space. 2682 2683 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor 2684 @item 2685 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an 2686 appropriate number of newlines. 2687 2688 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor 2689 @item 2690 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values. 2691 @end itemize 2692 2693 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or 2694 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can 2695 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive 2696 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver 2697 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a 2698 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of 2699 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}. 2700 2701 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants 2702 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not 2703 preprocessed. 2704 2705 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off 2706 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off 2707 @kindex #NO_APP 2708 @kindex #APP 2709 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the 2710 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file. 2711 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in 2712 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the 2713 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says 2714 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support 2715 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments 2716 and whitespace. 2717 2718 @node Whitespace 2719 @section Whitespace 2720 2721 @cindex whitespace 2722 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order. 2723 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for 2724 people to read. Unless within character constants 2725 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same 2726 as exactly one space. 2727 2728 @node Comments 2729 @section Comments 2730 2731 @cindex comments 2732 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both 2733 cases the comment is equivalent to one space. 2734 2735 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment. 2736 This means you may not nest these comments. 2737 2738 @smallexample 2739 /* 2740 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment 2741 is to use this sort of comment. 2742 */ 2743 2744 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */ 2745 @end smallexample 2746 2747 @cindex line comment character 2748 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is 2749 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target 2750 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have 2751 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a 2752 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line 2753 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending 2754 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the 2755 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets. 2756 2757 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the 2758 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and 2759 to specify logical line numbers: 2760 2761 @kindex # 2762 @cindex lines starting with @code{#} 2763 @cindex logical line numbers 2764 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a 2765 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute 2766 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next} 2767 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a 2768 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace. 2769 2770 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric, 2771 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.) 2772 2773 @smallexample 2774 # This is an ordinary comment. 2775 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name 2776 # This is logical line # 36. 2777 @end smallexample 2778 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions 2779 of @command{@value{AS}}. 2780 2781 @node Symbol Intro 2782 @section Symbols 2783 2784 @cindex characters used in symbols 2785 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS 2786 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all 2787 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters 2788 @samp{_.$}. 2789 @end ifclear 2790 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS 2791 @ifclear GENERIC 2792 @ifset H8 2793 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all 2794 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters 2795 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in 2796 symbol names.) 2797 @end ifset 2798 @end ifclear 2799 @end ifset 2800 @ifset GENERIC 2801 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions 2802 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. 2803 @end ifset 2804 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant. 2805 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters 2806 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the 2807 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end 2808 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}. 2809 2810 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such 2811 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double 2812 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a 2813 backslash @code{\} character. 2814 @cindex length of symbols 2815 2816 @node Statements 2817 @section Statements 2818 2819 @cindex statements, structure of 2820 @cindex line separator character 2821 @cindex statement separator character 2822 2823 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a 2824 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target 2825 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each 2826 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character. 2827 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the 2828 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an 2829 exception: they do not end statements. 2830 2831 @cindex newline, required at file end 2832 @cindex EOF, newline must precede 2833 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last 2834 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill 2835 2836 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored. 2837 2838 @cindex instructions and directives 2839 @cindex directives and instructions 2840 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to 2841 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc (a] cygnus.com, 2842 @c 13feb91. 2843 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a 2844 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key 2845 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the 2846 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler 2847 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with 2848 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it 2849 assembles into a machine language instruction. 2850 @ifset GENERIC 2851 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers 2852 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may 2853 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly 2854 language.@refill 2855 @end ifset 2856 2857 @cindex @code{:} (label) 2858 @cindex label (@code{:}) 2859 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}). 2860 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not 2861 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}. 2862 2863 @ifset HPPA 2864 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but 2865 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that 2866 only one label may be defined on each line. 2867 @end ifset 2868 2869 @smallexample 2870 label: .directive followed by something 2871 another_label: # This is an empty statement. 2872 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{} 2873 @end smallexample 2874 2875 @node Constants 2876 @section Constants 2877 2878 @cindex constants 2879 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by 2880 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this: 2881 @smallexample 2882 @group 2883 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value. 2884 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant. 2885 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum. 2886 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\ 2887 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum. 2888 @end group 2889 @end smallexample 2890 2891 @menu 2892 * Characters:: Character Constants 2893 * Numbers:: Number Constants 2894 @end menu 2895 2896 @node Characters 2897 @subsection Character Constants 2898 2899 @cindex character constants 2900 @cindex constants, character 2901 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands 2902 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in 2903 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string 2904 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be 2905 used in arithmetic expressions. 2906 2907 @menu 2908 * Strings:: Strings 2909 * Chars:: Characters 2910 @end menu 2911 2912 @node Strings 2913 @subsubsection Strings 2914 2915 @cindex string constants 2916 @cindex constants, string 2917 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain 2918 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters 2919 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with 2920 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents 2921 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells 2922 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash 2923 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an 2924 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows. 2925 2926 @cindex escape codes, character 2927 @cindex character escape codes 2928 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character. 2929 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the 2930 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates: 2931 @c NOTE: \initial {\\} 2932 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message: 2933 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }. 2934 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been 2935 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem. 2936 @table @kbd 2937 @c @item \a 2938 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007. 2939 @c 2940 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character) 2941 @cindex backspace (@code{\b}) 2942 @item \b 2943 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010. 2944 2945 @c @item \e 2946 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004. 2947 @c 2948 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character) 2949 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f}) 2950 @item backslash-f 2951 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014. 2952 2953 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character) 2954 @cindex newline (@code{\n}) 2955 @item \n 2956 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012. 2957 2958 @c @item \p 2959 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}. 2960 @c 2961 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character) 2962 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r}) 2963 @item \r 2964 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015. 2965 2966 @c @item \s 2967 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with 2968 @c other assemblers. 2969 @c 2970 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab) 2971 @cindex tab (@code{\t}) 2972 @item \t 2973 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011. 2974 2975 @c @item \v 2976 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013. 2977 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit} 2978 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits. 2979 @c 2980 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code) 2981 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}}) 2982 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit} 2983 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits. 2984 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits: 2985 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011. 2986 2987 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code) 2988 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}}) 2989 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...} 2990 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or 2991 lower case @code{x} works. 2992 2993 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character) 2994 @cindex backslash (@code{\\}) 2995 @item \\ 2996 Represents one @samp{\} character. 2997 2998 @c @item \' 2999 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character. 3000 @c This is needed in single character literals 3001 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent 3002 @c a @samp{'}. 3003 @c 3004 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character) 3005 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"}) 3006 @item \" 3007 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent 3008 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string. 3009 3010 @item \ @var{anything-else} 3011 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but 3012 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if 3013 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal 3014 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no 3015 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong 3016 code and warns you of the fact. 3017 @end table 3018 3019 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent, 3020 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think 3021 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C 3022 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape 3023 sequence. 3024 3025 @node Chars 3026 @subsubsection Characters 3027 3028 @cindex single character constant 3029 @cindex character, single 3030 @cindex constant, single character 3031 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately 3032 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as 3033 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you 3034 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second 3035 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a 3036 grave accent. A newline 3037 @ifclear GENERIC 3038 @ifclear abnormal-separator 3039 (or semicolon @samp{;}) 3040 @end ifclear 3041 @ifset abnormal-separator 3042 @ifset H8 3043 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the 3044 Renesas SH) 3045 @end ifset 3046 @end ifset 3047 @end ifclear 3048 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character 3049 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character 3050 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for 3051 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII: 3052 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill 3053 3054 @node Numbers 3055 @subsection Number Constants 3056 3057 @cindex constants, number 3058 @cindex number constants 3059 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they 3060 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that 3061 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are 3062 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums} 3063 are floating point numbers, described below. 3064 3065 @menu 3066 * Integers:: Integers 3067 * Bignums:: Bignums 3068 * Flonums:: Flonums 3069 @ifclear GENERIC 3070 @ifset I960 3071 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields 3072 @end ifset 3073 @end ifclear 3074 @end menu 3075 3076 @node Integers 3077 @subsubsection Integers 3078 @cindex integers 3079 @cindex constants, integer 3080 3081 @cindex binary integers 3082 @cindex integers, binary 3083 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of 3084 the binary digits @samp{01}. 3085 3086 @cindex octal integers 3087 @cindex integers, octal 3088 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal 3089 digits (@samp{01234567}). 3090 3091 @cindex decimal integers 3092 @cindex integers, decimal 3093 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or 3094 more digits (@samp{0123456789}). 3095 3096 @cindex hexadecimal integers 3097 @cindex integers, hexadecimal 3098 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or 3099 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}. 3100 3101 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use 3102 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions 3103 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}). 3104 3105 @node Bignums 3106 @subsubsection Bignums 3107 3108 @cindex bignums 3109 @cindex constants, bignum 3110 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer 3111 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to 3112 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places 3113 integers are permitted while bignums are not. 3114 3115 @node Flonums 3116 @subsubsection Flonums 3117 @cindex flonums 3118 @cindex floating point numbers 3119 @cindex constants, floating point 3120 3121 @cindex precision, floating point 3122 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is 3123 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by 3124 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than 3125 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted 3126 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a 3127 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer. 3128 3129 A flonum is written by writing (in order) 3130 @itemize @bullet 3131 @item 3132 The digit @samp{0}. 3133 @ifset HPPA 3134 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.) 3135 @end ifset 3136 3137 @item 3138 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum. 3139 @ifset GENERIC 3140 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important. 3141 @ignore 3142 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases 3143 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD 3144 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.) 3145 @end ignore 3146 3147 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH, 3148 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be 3149 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case). 3150 3151 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS} 3152 (in upper or lower case). 3153 3154 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be 3155 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case). 3156 3157 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only). 3158 @end ifset 3159 @ifclear GENERIC 3160 @ifset ARC 3161 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case). 3162 @end ifset 3163 @ifset H8 3164 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case). 3165 @end ifset 3166 @ifset HPPA 3167 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only). 3168 @end ifset 3169 @ifset I960 3170 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case). 3171 @end ifset 3172 @end ifclear 3173 3174 @item 3175 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}. 3176 3177 @item 3178 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits. 3179 3180 @item 3181 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero 3182 or more decimal digits. 3183 3184 @item 3185 An optional exponent, consisting of: 3186 3187 @itemize @bullet 3188 @item 3189 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}. 3190 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in 3191 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets. 3192 @item 3193 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}. 3194 @item 3195 One or more decimal digits. 3196 @end itemize 3197 3198 @end itemize 3199 3200 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be 3201 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value. 3202 3203 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed 3204 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running 3205 @command{@value{AS}}. 3206 3207 @ifclear GENERIC 3208 @ifset I960 3209 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled 3210 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91) 3211 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS. 3212 @node Bit Fields 3213 @subsubsection Bit Fields 3214 3215 @cindex bit fields 3216 @cindex constants, bit field 3217 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}. 3218 Specify two numbers separated by a colon--- 3219 @example 3220 @var{mask}:@var{value} 3221 @end example 3222 @noindent 3223 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and 3224 @var{value}. 3225 3226 The resulting number is then packed 3227 @ifset GENERIC 3228 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960 3229 (in host-dependent byte order) 3230 @end ifset 3231 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the 3232 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and 3233 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead, 3234 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the 3235 least significant digits.@refill 3236 3237 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long}, 3238 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments. 3239 @end ifset 3240 @end ifclear 3241 3242 @node Sections 3243 @chapter Sections and Relocation 3244 @cindex sections 3245 @cindex relocation 3246 3247 @menu 3248 * Secs Background:: Background 3249 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections 3250 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections 3251 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections 3252 * bss:: bss Section 3253 @end menu 3254 3255 @node Secs Background 3256 @section Background 3257 3258 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data 3259 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose. 3260 For example there may be a ``read only'' section. 3261 3262 @cindex linker, and assembler 3263 @cindex assembler, and linker 3264 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and 3265 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}} 3266 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0. 3267 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that 3268 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an 3269 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses 3270 sections. 3271 3272 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time 3273 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid 3274 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes 3275 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning 3276 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes 3277 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to 3278 the proper run-time addresses. 3279 @ifset H8 3280 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH, 3281 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to 3282 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary. 3283 @end ifset 3284 3285 @cindex standard assembler sections 3286 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any 3287 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and 3288 @dfn{bss} sections. 3289 3290 @ifset COFF-ELF 3291 @ifset GENERIC 3292 When it generates COFF or ELF output, 3293 @end ifset 3294 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify 3295 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}). 3296 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text} 3297 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty. 3298 @end ifset 3299 3300 @ifset HPPA 3301 @ifset GENERIC 3302 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA, 3303 @end ifset 3304 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you 3305 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See 3306 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual} 3307 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} 3308 assembler directives. 3309 3310 @ifset SOM 3311 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard 3312 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text 3313 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and 3314 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}. 3315 @end ifset 3316 @end ifset 3317 3318 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the 3319 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section. 3320 3321 @ifset HPPA 3322 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text 3323 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address 3324 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section. 3325 @end ifset 3326 3327 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are 3328 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the 3329 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation 3330 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object 3331 file is mentioned: 3332 @itemize @bullet 3333 @item 3334 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to 3335 an address? 3336 @item 3337 How long (in bytes) is this reference? 3338 @item 3339 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of 3340 @display 3341 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})? 3342 @end display 3343 @item 3344 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''? 3345 @end itemize 3346 3347 @cindex addresses, format of 3348 @cindex section-relative addressing 3349 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as 3350 @display 3351 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section}) 3352 @end display 3353 @noindent 3354 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative 3355 nature. 3356 @ifset SOM 3357 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are 3358 symbol-relative instead.) 3359 @end ifset 3360 3361 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset 3362 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.'' 3363 3364 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the 3365 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs, 3366 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address 3367 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by 3368 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs' 3369 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition} 3370 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one 3371 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as 3372 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program. 3373 3374 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any 3375 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition 3376 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later. 3377 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined 3378 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named 3379 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly 3380 time so it has section @emph{undefined}. 3381 3382 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in 3383 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text 3384 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is 3385 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all 3386 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for 3387 data and bss sections. 3388 3389 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for 3390 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly. 3391 3392 @node Ld Sections 3393 @section Linker Sections 3394 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below. 3395 3396 @table @strong 3397 3398 @ifset COFF-ELF 3399 @cindex named sections 3400 @cindex sections, named 3401 @item named sections 3402 @end ifset 3403 @ifset aout-bout 3404 @cindex text section 3405 @cindex data section 3406 @itemx text section 3407 @itemx data section 3408 @end ifset 3409 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as 3410 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is 3411 true of another. 3412 @c @ifset aout-bout 3413 When the program is running, however, it is 3414 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The 3415 text section is often shared among processes: it contains 3416 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running 3417 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored 3418 in the data section. 3419 @c @end ifset 3420 3421 @cindex bss section 3422 @item bss section 3423 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It 3424 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of 3425 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts 3426 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero 3427 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate 3428 those explicit zeros from object files. 3429 3430 @cindex absolute section 3431 @item absolute section 3432 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0. 3433 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must 3434 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute 3435 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation. 3436 3437 @cindex undefined section 3438 @item undefined section 3439 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in 3440 the preceding sections. 3441 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here. 3442 @end table 3443 3444 @cindex relocation example 3445 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows. 3446 @ifset COFF-ELF 3447 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}. 3448 @end ifset 3449 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis. 3450 3451 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3452 @ifnottex 3453 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3454 @smallexample 3455 +-----+----+--+ 3456 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00| 3457 +-----+----+--+ 3458 3459 text data bss 3460 seg. seg. seg. 3461 3462 +---+---+---+ 3463 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000| 3464 +---+---+---+ 3465 3466 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ 3467 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000| 3468 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ 3469 3470 addresses: 0 @dots{} 3471 @end smallexample 3472 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3473 @end ifnottex 3474 @need 5000 3475 @tex 3476 \bigskip 3477 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil} 3478 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} 3479 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil} 3480 3481 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil} 3482 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} 3483 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil} 3484 3485 \line{\it linked program: \hfil} 3486 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} 3487 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt 3488 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt 3489 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil} 3490 3491 \line{\it addresses: \hfil} 3492 \line{0\dots\hfil} 3493 3494 @end tex 3495 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3496 3497 @node As Sections 3498 @section Assembler Internal Sections 3499 3500 @cindex internal assembler sections 3501 @cindex sections in messages, internal 3502 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They 3503 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these 3504 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}} 3505 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their 3506 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the 3507 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a 3508 section-relative address. 3509 3510 @table @b 3511 @cindex assembler internal logic error 3512 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR! 3513 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a 3514 bug in the assembler. 3515 3516 @cindex expr (internal section) 3517 @item expr section 3518 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of 3519 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts 3520 it in the expr section. 3521 @c FIXME item debug 3522 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload 3523 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload 3524 @c FIXME item register 3525 @end table 3526 3527 @node Sub-Sections 3528 @section Sub-Sections 3529 3530 @cindex numbered subsections 3531 @cindex grouping data 3532 @ifset aout-bout 3533 Assembled bytes 3534 @ifset COFF-ELF 3535 conventionally 3536 @end ifset 3537 fall into two sections: text and data. 3538 @end ifset 3539 You may have separate groups of 3540 @ifset GENERIC 3541 data in named sections 3542 @end ifset 3543 @ifclear GENERIC 3544 @ifclear aout-bout 3545 data in named sections 3546 @end ifclear 3547 @ifset aout-bout 3548 text or data 3549 @end ifset 3550 @end ifclear 3551 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they 3552 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to 3553 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be 3554 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the 3555 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same 3556 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text 3557 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being 3558 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each 3559 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of 3560 constants being output. 3561 3562 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything 3563 goes in subsection number zero. 3564 3565 @ifset GENERIC 3566 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes. 3567 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors 3568 of @command{@value{AS}}.) 3569 @end ifset 3570 @ifclear GENERIC 3571 @ifset H8 3572 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word 3573 boundary (two bytes). 3574 The same is true on the Renesas SH. 3575 @end ifset 3576 @ifset I960 3577 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)? 3578 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that 3579 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration, 3580 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue, 3581 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be 3582 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such). 3583 @end ifset 3584 @end ifclear 3585 3586 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered 3587 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.) 3588 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and 3589 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them. 3590 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your 3591 data subsections as a data section. 3592 3593 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled 3594 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text 3595 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement. 3596 @ifset COFF 3597 @ifset GENERIC 3598 When generating COFF output, you 3599 @end ifset 3600 @ifclear GENERIC 3601 You 3602 @end ifclear 3603 can also use an extra subsection 3604 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name}, 3605 @var{expression}}. 3606 @end ifset 3607 @ifset ELF 3608 @ifset GENERIC 3609 When generating ELF output, you 3610 @end ifset 3611 @ifclear GENERIC 3612 You 3613 @end ifclear 3614 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection}) 3615 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}. 3616 @end ifset 3617 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression 3618 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0} 3619 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly 3620 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance: 3621 @smallexample 3622 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway. 3623 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *" 3624 .text 1 3625 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection." 3626 .data 0 3627 .ascii "This lives in the data section," 3628 .ascii "in the first data subsection." 3629 .text 0 3630 .ascii "This lives in the first text section," 3631 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)." 3632 @end smallexample 3633 3634 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte 3635 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience 3636 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location 3637 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the 3638 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its 3639 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being 3640 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter. 3641 3642 @node bss 3643 @section bss Section 3644 3645 @cindex bss section 3646 @cindex common variable storage 3647 The bss section is used for local common variable storage. 3648 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may 3649 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When 3650 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss 3651 section are zeroed bytes. 3652 3653 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see 3654 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}. 3655 3656 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is 3657 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}. 3658 3659 @ifset GENERIC 3660 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or 3661 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual; 3662 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the 3663 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and 3664 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}). 3665 @end ifset 3666 3667 @node Symbols 3668 @chapter Symbols 3669 3670 @cindex symbols 3671 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name 3672 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols 3673 to debug. 3674 3675 @quotation 3676 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order 3677 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in 3678 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers. 3679 @end quotation 3680 3681 @menu 3682 * Labels:: Labels 3683 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values 3684 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names 3685 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol 3686 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes 3687 @end menu 3688 3689 @node Labels 3690 @section Labels 3691 3692 @cindex labels 3693 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon 3694 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the 3695 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction 3696 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two 3697 different locations: the first definition overrides any other 3698 definitions. 3699 3700 @ifset HPPA 3701 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a 3702 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on 3703 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also 3704 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly. 3705 @end ifset 3706 3707 @node Setting Symbols 3708 @section Giving Symbols Other Values 3709 3710 @cindex assigning values to symbols 3711 @cindex symbol values, assigning 3712 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed 3713 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression 3714 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set} 3715 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double 3716 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the 3717 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}. 3718 3719 @ifset Blackfin 3720 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}. 3721 @end ifset 3722 3723 @node Symbol Names 3724 @section Symbol Names 3725 3726 @cindex symbol names 3727 @cindex names, symbol 3728 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS 3729 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most 3730 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are 3731 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any 3732 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a 3733 particular target machine), and underscores. 3734 @end ifclear 3735 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS 3736 @ifset H8 3737 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the 3738 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That 3739 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save 3740 on the H8/300), and underscores. 3741 @end ifset 3742 @end ifset 3743 3744 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name 3745 than @code{Foo}. 3746 3747 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for 3748 Local Labels. See below. 3749 3750 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing 3751 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf 3752 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not 3753 currently supported. 3754 3755 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program 3756 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times 3757 in a program. 3758 3759 @subheading Local Symbol Names 3760 3761 @cindex local symbol names 3762 @cindex symbol names, local 3763 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes. 3764 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or 3765 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own 3766 set of local label prefixes. 3767 @ifset HPPA 3768 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}. 3769 @end ifset 3770 3771 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are 3772 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging. 3773 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols}) 3774 to retain the local symbols in the object files. 3775 3776 @subheading Local Labels 3777 3778 @cindex local labels 3779 @cindex temporary symbol names 3780 @cindex symbol names, temporary 3781 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and 3782 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to 3783 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be 3784 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of 3785 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer). 3786 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write 3787 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer 3788 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b} 3789 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''. 3790 3791 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them 3792 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using 3793 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently 3794 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next 3795 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth 3796 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are 3797 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others. 3798 3799 Here is an example: 3800 3801 @smallexample 3802 1: branch 1f 3803 2: branch 1b 3804 1: branch 2f 3805 2: branch 1b 3806 @end smallexample 3807 3808 Which is the equivalent of: 3809 3810 @smallexample 3811 label_1: branch label_3 3812 label_2: branch label_1 3813 label_3: branch label_4 3814 label_4: branch label_3 3815 @end smallexample 3816 3817 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately 3818 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them. 3819 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and 3820 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using 3821 these parts: 3822 3823 @table @code 3824 @item @emph{local label prefix} 3825 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix. 3826 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols 3827 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are 3828 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the 3829 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the 3830 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols, 3831 you may use them in debugging. 3832 3833 @item @var{number} 3834 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the 3835 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}. 3836 3837 @item @kbd{C-B} 3838 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol 3839 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B). 3840 3841 @item @emph{ordinal number} 3842 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of 3843 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the 3844 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets 3845 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well. 3846 @end table 3847 3848 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and 3849 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}. 3850 3851 @subheading Dollar Local Labels 3852 @cindex dollar local symbols 3853 3854 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of 3855 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they 3856 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain 3857 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels, 3858 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined 3859 by another occurrence of the same local label. 3860 3861 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels, 3862 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g., 3863 @samp{@b{55$:}}. 3864 3865 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed 3866 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character 3867 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of 3868 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}. 3869 3870 @node Dot 3871 @section The Special Dot Symbol 3872 3873 @cindex dot (symbol) 3874 @cindex @code{.} (symbol) 3875 @cindex current address 3876 @cindex location counter 3877 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that 3878 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin: 3879 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address. 3880 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org} 3881 directive. 3882 @ifclear no-space-dir 3883 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying 3884 @samp{.space 4}. 3885 @end ifclear 3886 3887 @node Symbol Attributes 3888 @section Symbol Attributes 3889 3890 @cindex symbol attributes 3891 @cindex attributes, symbol 3892 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and 3893 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary 3894 attributes. 3895 @ifset INTERNALS 3896 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}. 3897 @end ifset 3898 3899 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for 3900 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the 3901 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you 3902 would want. 3903 3904 @menu 3905 * Symbol Value:: Value 3906 * Symbol Type:: Type 3907 @ifset aout-bout 3908 @ifset GENERIC 3909 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3910 @end ifset 3911 @ifclear GENERIC 3912 @ifclear BOUT 3913 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3914 @end ifclear 3915 @ifset BOUT 3916 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out} 3917 @end ifset 3918 @end ifclear 3919 @end ifset 3920 @ifset COFF 3921 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF 3922 @end ifset 3923 @ifset SOM 3924 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM 3925 @end ifset 3926 @end menu 3927 3928 @node Symbol Value 3929 @subsection Value 3930 3931 @cindex value of a symbol 3932 @cindex symbol value 3933 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a 3934 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the 3935 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label. 3936 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes 3937 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute 3938 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are 3939 called absolute. 3940 3941 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is 3942 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and 3943 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the 3944 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol 3945 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm} 3946 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in 3947 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the 3948 allocated storage. 3949 3950 @node Symbol Type 3951 @subsection Type 3952 3953 @cindex type of a symbol 3954 @cindex symbol type 3955 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section) 3956 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and 3957 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact 3958 format depends on the object-code output format in use. 3959 3960 @ifset aout-bout 3961 @ifclear GENERIC 3962 @ifset BOUT 3963 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be 3964 @c better if it were available outside examples. 3965 @need 1000 3966 @node a.out Symbols 3967 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out} 3968 3969 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes 3970 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out} 3971 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for 3972 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or 3973 @code{b.out}. 3974 3975 @end ifset 3976 @ifclear BOUT 3977 @node a.out Symbols 3978 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3979 3980 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes 3981 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out} 3982 3983 @end ifclear 3984 @end ifclear 3985 @ifset GENERIC 3986 @node a.out Symbols 3987 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3988 3989 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes 3990 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out} 3991 3992 @end ifset 3993 @menu 3994 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor 3995 * Symbol Other:: Other 3996 @end menu 3997 3998 @node Symbol Desc 3999 @subsubsection Descriptor 4000 4001 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol 4002 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's 4003 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement 4004 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to 4005 @command{@value{AS}}. 4006 4007 @node Symbol Other 4008 @subsubsection Other 4009 4010 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol 4011 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}. 4012 @end ifset 4013 4014 @ifset COFF 4015 @node COFF Symbols 4016 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF 4017 4018 @cindex COFF symbol attributes 4019 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF 4020 4021 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes; 4022 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and 4023 @code{.endef} directives. 4024 4025 @subsubsection Primary Attributes 4026 4027 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols 4028 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type, 4029 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}. 4030 4031 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes 4032 4033 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols 4034 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl}, 4035 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol 4036 table information for COFF. 4037 @end ifset 4038 4039 @ifset SOM 4040 @node SOM Symbols 4041 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM 4042 4043 @cindex SOM symbol attributes 4044 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM 4045 4046 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with 4047 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives. 4048 4049 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly 4050 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and 4051 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation. 4052 @end ifset 4053 4054 @node Expressions 4055 @chapter Expressions 4056 4057 @cindex expressions 4058 @cindex addresses 4059 @cindex numeric values 4060 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value. 4061 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression. 4062 4063 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into 4064 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not 4065 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its 4066 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret 4067 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented. 4068 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation. 4069 4070 @menu 4071 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions 4072 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions 4073 @end menu 4074 4075 @node Empty Exprs 4076 @section Empty Expressions 4077 4078 @cindex empty expressions 4079 @cindex expressions, empty 4080 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null. 4081 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the 4082 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This 4083 is compatible with other assemblers. 4084 4085 @node Integer Exprs 4086 @section Integer Expressions 4087 4088 @cindex integer expressions 4089 @cindex expressions, integer 4090 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited 4091 by @emph{operators}. 4092 4093 @menu 4094 * Arguments:: Arguments 4095 * Operators:: Operators 4096 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators 4097 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators 4098 @end menu 4099 4100 @node Arguments 4101 @subsection Arguments 4102 4103 @cindex expression arguments 4104 @cindex arguments in expressions 4105 @cindex operands in expressions 4106 @cindex arithmetic operands 4107 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other 4108 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In 4109 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of 4110 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of 4111 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine 4112 instruction operands. 4113 4114 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where 4115 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute, 4116 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit 4117 integer. 4118 4119 Numbers are usually integers. 4120 4121 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned 4122 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends 4123 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating 4124 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other 4125 assemblers. 4126 4127 @cindex subexpressions 4128 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer 4129 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix 4130 operator followed by an argument. 4131 4132 @node Operators 4133 @subsection Operators 4134 4135 @cindex operators, in expressions 4136 @cindex arithmetic functions 4137 @cindex functions, in expressions 4138 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix 4139 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear 4140 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by 4141 whitespace. 4142 4143 @node Prefix Ops 4144 @subsection Prefix Operator 4145 4146 @cindex prefix operators 4147 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take 4148 one argument, which must be absolute. 4149 4150 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make 4151 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next 4152 @c section (which is inside an enumerate). 4153 @tex 4154 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4155 @end tex 4156 4157 @table @code 4158 @item - 4159 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation. 4160 @item ~ 4161 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not. 4162 @end table 4163 4164 @tex 4165 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent 4166 @end tex 4167 4168 @node Infix Ops 4169 @subsection Infix Operators 4170 4171 @cindex infix operators 4172 @cindex operators, permitted arguments 4173 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators 4174 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left 4175 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be 4176 absolute, and the result is absolute. 4177 4178 @enumerate 4179 @cindex operator precedence 4180 @cindex precedence of operators 4181 4182 @item 4183 Highest Precedence 4184 4185 @table @code 4186 @item * 4187 @dfn{Multiplication}. 4188 4189 @item / 4190 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/} 4191 4192 @item % 4193 @dfn{Remainder}. 4194 4195 @item << 4196 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}. 4197 4198 @item >> 4199 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}. 4200 @end table 4201 4202 @item 4203 Intermediate precedence 4204 4205 @table @code 4206 @item | 4207 4208 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}. 4209 4210 @item & 4211 @dfn{Bitwise And}. 4212 4213 @item ^ 4214 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}. 4215 4216 @item ! 4217 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}. 4218 @end table 4219 4220 @item 4221 Low Precedence 4222 4223 @table @code 4224 @cindex addition, permitted arguments 4225 @cindex plus, permitted arguments 4226 @cindex arguments for addition 4227 @item + 4228 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of 4229 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different 4230 sections. 4231 4232 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments 4233 @cindex minus, permitted arguments 4234 @cindex arguments for subtraction 4235 @item - 4236 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the 4237 result has the section of the left argument. 4238 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute. 4239 You may not subtract arguments from different sections. 4240 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ? 4241 4242 @cindex comparison expressions 4243 @cindex expressions, comparison 4244 @item == 4245 @dfn{Is Equal To} 4246 @item <> 4247 @itemx != 4248 @dfn{Is Not Equal To} 4249 @item < 4250 @dfn{Is Less Than} 4251 @item > 4252 @dfn{Is Greater Than} 4253 @item >= 4254 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To} 4255 @item <= 4256 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To} 4257 4258 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a 4259 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators 4260 perform signed comparisons. 4261 @end table 4262 4263 @item Lowest Precedence 4264 4265 @table @code 4266 @item && 4267 @dfn{Logical And}. 4268 4269 @item || 4270 @dfn{Logical Or}. 4271 4272 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub 4273 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a 4274 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical 4275 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and. 4276 4277 @end table 4278 @end enumerate 4279 4280 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an 4281 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments. 4282 4283 @node Pseudo Ops 4284 @chapter Assembler Directives 4285 4286 @cindex directives, machine independent 4287 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent 4288 @cindex machine independent directives 4289 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}). 4290 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written 4291 in lower case. 4292 4293 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the 4294 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler. 4295 @ifset GENERIC 4296 Some machine configurations provide additional directives. 4297 @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 4298 @end ifset 4299 @ifclear GENERIC 4300 @ifset machine-directives 4301 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives. 4302 @end ifset 4303 @end ifclear 4304 4305 @menu 4306 * Abort:: @code{.abort} 4307 @ifset COFF 4308 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT} 4309 @end ifset 4310 4311 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}} 4312 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro} 4313 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4314 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4315 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}} 4316 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc 4317 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}} 4318 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc. 4319 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} } 4320 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}} 4321 @ifset COFF 4322 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}} 4323 @end ifset 4324 @ifset aout-bout 4325 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}} 4326 @end ifset 4327 @ifset COFF 4328 * Dim:: @code{.dim} 4329 @end ifset 4330 4331 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}} 4332 * Eject:: @code{.eject} 4333 * Else:: @code{.else} 4334 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif} 4335 * End:: @code{.end} 4336 @ifset COFF 4337 * Endef:: @code{.endef} 4338 @end ifset 4339 4340 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc} 4341 * Endif:: @code{.endif} 4342 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4343 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4344 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4345 * Err:: @code{.err} 4346 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}} 4347 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm} 4348 * Extern:: @code{.extern} 4349 * Fail:: @code{.fail} 4350 * File:: @code{.file} 4351 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}} 4352 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}} 4353 * Func:: @code{.func} 4354 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}} 4355 @ifset ELF 4356 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}} 4357 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}} 4358 @end ifset 4359 4360 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}} 4361 * Ident:: @code{.ident} 4362 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}} 4363 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]} 4364 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"} 4365 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}} 4366 @ifset ELF 4367 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}} 4368 @end ifset 4369 4370 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 4371 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 4372 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}} 4373 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags} 4374 @ifclear no-line-dir 4375 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}} 4376 @end ifclear 4377 4378 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]} 4379 * List:: @code{.list} 4380 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}} 4381 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}} 4382 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}} 4383 @ifset ELF 4384 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}} 4385 @end ifset 4386 4387 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}} 4388 @ignore 4389 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4390 @end ignore 4391 4392 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{} 4393 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}} 4394 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro} 4395 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist} 4396 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}} 4397 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}} 4398 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}} 4399 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 4400 @ifset ELF 4401 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection} 4402 * Previous:: @code{.previous} 4403 @end ifset 4404 4405 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}} 4406 @ifset ELF 4407 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}} 4408 @end ifset 4409 4410 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}} 4411 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}} 4412 @ifset ELF 4413 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}} 4414 @end ifset 4415 4416 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}} 4417 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]} 4418 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}} 4419 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"} 4420 @ifset COFF 4421 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}} 4422 @end ifset 4423 @ifset COFF-ELF 4424 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]} 4425 @end ifset 4426 4427 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4428 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}} 4429 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}} 4430 @ifset COFF-ELF 4431 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]} 4432 @end ifset 4433 @ifclear no-space-dir 4434 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}} 4435 @end ifclear 4436 4437 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}} 4438 @ifclear no-space-dir 4439 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}} 4440 @end ifclear 4441 @ifset have-stabs 4442 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs} 4443 @end ifset 4444 4445 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"} 4446 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}} 4447 @ifset ELF 4448 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection} 4449 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}} 4450 @end ifset 4451 4452 @ifset COFF 4453 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}} 4454 @end ifset 4455 4456 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}} 4457 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"} 4458 @ifset COFF-ELF 4459 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>} 4460 @end ifset 4461 4462 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}} 4463 @ifset COFF 4464 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}} 4465 @end ifset 4466 4467 @ifset ELF 4468 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"} 4469 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}} 4470 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}} 4471 @end ifset 4472 4473 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}} 4474 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}} 4475 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}} 4476 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}} 4477 @ifclear no-space-dir 4478 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}} 4479 @end ifclear 4480 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives 4481 @end menu 4482 4483 @node Abort 4484 @section @code{.abort} 4485 4486 @cindex @code{abort} directive 4487 @cindex stopping the assembly 4488 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for 4489 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the 4490 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender 4491 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to 4492 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported. 4493 4494 @ifset COFF 4495 @node ABORT (COFF) 4496 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF) 4497 4498 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive 4499 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a 4500 synonym for @samp{.abort}. 4501 4502 @ifset BOUT 4503 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, 4504 but ignores it. 4505 @end ifset 4506 @end ifset 4507 4508 @node Align 4509 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 4510 4511 @cindex padding the location counter 4512 @cindex @code{align} directive 4513 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage 4514 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment 4515 required, as described below. 4516 4517 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the 4518 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the 4519 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is 4520 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled 4521 with no-op instructions. 4522 4523 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, 4524 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment 4525 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the 4526 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the 4527 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the 4528 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled 4529 with no-op instructions when appropriate. 4530 4531 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system. 4532 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k, 4533 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the 4534 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances 4535 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter 4536 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the 4537 first expression is the alignment request in words. 4538 4539 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and 4540 strongarm, it is the 4541 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after 4542 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location 4543 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a 4544 multiple of 8, no change is needed. 4545 4546 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various 4547 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate. 4548 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives, 4549 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all 4550 architectures (but are specific to GAS). 4551 4552 @node Altmacro 4553 @section @code{.altmacro} 4554 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling: 4555 4556 @ftable @code 4557 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ] 4558 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to 4559 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and 4560 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The 4561 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each 4562 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that 4563 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions. 4564 4565 @item String delimiters 4566 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides 4567 @code{"@var{string}"}: 4568 4569 @table @code 4570 @item '@var{string}' 4571 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters. 4572 4573 @item <@var{string}> 4574 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets. 4575 @end table 4576 4577 @item single-character string escape 4578 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the 4579 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the 4580 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can 4581 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}. 4582 4583 @item Expression results as strings 4584 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr} 4585 and use the result as a string. 4586 @end ftable 4587 4588 @node Ascii 4589 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4590 4591 @cindex @code{ascii} directive 4592 @cindex string literals 4593 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings}) 4594 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic 4595 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses. 4596 4597 @node Asciz 4598 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4599 4600 @cindex @code{asciz} directive 4601 @cindex zero-terminated strings 4602 @cindex null-terminated strings 4603 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by 4604 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''. 4605 4606 @node Balign 4607 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 4608 4609 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes 4610 @cindex @code{balign} directive 4611 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular 4612 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the 4613 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances 4614 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter 4615 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. 4616 4617 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the 4618 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the 4619 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is 4620 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled 4621 with no-op instructions. 4622 4623 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, 4624 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment 4625 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the 4626 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the 4627 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the 4628 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled 4629 with no-op instructions when appropriate. 4630 4631 @cindex @code{balignw} directive 4632 @cindex @code{balignl} directive 4633 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the 4634 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill 4635 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the 4636 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw 4637 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be 4638 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon 4639 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is 4640 undefined. 4641 4642 @node Bundle directives 4643 @section Bundle directives 4644 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}} 4645 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive 4646 @cindex bundle 4647 @cindex instruction bundle 4648 @cindex aligned instruction bundle 4649 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction 4650 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped 4651 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is 4652 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it 4653 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the 4654 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}). 4655 4656 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a 4657 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of 4658 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if 4659 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned 4660 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in 4661 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an 4662 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of 4663 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the 4664 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction 4665 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single 4666 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size. 4667 4668 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} 4669 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive 4670 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive 4671 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives 4672 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives 4673 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable 4674 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when 4675 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last 4676 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}. 4677 4678 @cindex bundle-locked 4679 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may 4680 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple 4681 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock} 4682 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked} 4683 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a 4684 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with 4685 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the 4686 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle 4687 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the 4688 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an 4689 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the 4690 bundle size. 4691 4692 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} 4693 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be 4694 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next 4695 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be 4696 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the 4697 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives. 4698 4699 @node Byte 4700 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}} 4701 4702 @cindex @code{byte} directive 4703 @cindex integers, one byte 4704 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. 4705 Each expression is assembled into the next byte. 4706 4707 @node CFI directives 4708 @section CFI directives 4709 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}} 4710 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive 4711 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives 4712 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section. 4713 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted, 4714 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted. 4715 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this 4716 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}. 4717 4718 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated 4719 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}. 4720 4721 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx} 4722 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target. 4723 4724 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different 4725 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI 4726 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to 4727 redefine it will result in an error. 4728 4729 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]} 4730 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive 4731 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that 4732 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal 4733 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by 4734 @code{.cfi_endproc}. 4735 4736 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple} 4737 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions. 4738 4739 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc} 4740 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive 4741 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its 4742 unwind entry previously opened by 4743 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}. 4744 4745 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]} 4746 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive 4747 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding. 4748 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality 4749 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second 4750 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be 4751 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings, 4752 the symbol provided should be the location where personality 4753 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself. 4754 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff}, 4755 no personality routine. 4756 4757 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}} 4758 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive 4759 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as 4760 defined in a compact unwinding format. 4761 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e. 4762 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}. 4763 4764 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]} 4765 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive 4766 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be 4767 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the 4768 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or 4769 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise. 4770 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e. 4771 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}. 4772 4773 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]} 4774 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding. 4775 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA 4776 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second 4777 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant 4778 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff}, 4779 meaning that no LSDA is present. 4780 4781 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}] 4782 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and 4783 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section. 4784 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive. 4785 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e. 4786 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}. 4787 4788 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point, 4789 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol 4790 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined 4791 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated 4792 by a section directive. 4793 4794 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required. 4795 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the 4796 @code{.p2align} directive. 4797 4798 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}} 4799 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take 4800 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}. 4801 4802 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}} 4803 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From 4804 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset 4805 remains the same. 4806 4807 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}} 4808 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register 4809 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the 4810 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute 4811 CFA address. 4812 4813 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}} 4814 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative 4815 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset. 4816 4817 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}} 4818 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from 4819 CFA. 4820 4821 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}} 4822 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from 4823 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset} 4824 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA. 4825 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the 4826 code it's annotating. 4827 4828 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}} 4829 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}. 4830 4831 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}} 4832 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the 4833 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial 4834 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed. 4835 4836 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}} 4837 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore. 4838 4839 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}} 4840 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame, 4841 i.e. no restoration needed. 4842 4843 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state} 4844 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an 4845 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and 4846 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have 4847 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control 4848 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming 4849 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}): 4850 4851 @smallexample 4852 je label 4853 popq %rbx 4854 .cfi_restore %rbx 4855 popq %r12 4856 .cfi_restore %r12 4857 popq %rbp 4858 .cfi_restore %rbp 4859 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8 4860 ret 4861 label: 4862 /* Do something else */ 4863 @end smallexample 4864 4865 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding 4866 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple 4867 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save 4868 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of 4869 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead, 4870 we can write: 4871 4872 @smallexample 4873 je label 4874 popq %rbx 4875 .cfi_remember_state 4876 .cfi_restore %rbx 4877 popq %r12 4878 .cfi_restore %r12 4879 popq %rbp 4880 .cfi_restore %rbp 4881 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8 4882 ret 4883 label: 4884 .cfi_restore_state 4885 /* Do something else */ 4886 @end smallexample 4887 4888 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same 4889 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple 4890 @code{.cfi} directives. 4891 4892 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}} 4893 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either 4894 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}. 4895 4896 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame} 4897 Mark current function as signal trampoline. 4898 4899 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save} 4900 SPARC register window has been saved. 4901 4902 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}] 4903 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One 4904 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI 4905 opcodes that GAS does not yet support. 4906 4907 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}} 4908 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label} 4909 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the 4910 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding. 4911 4912 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably 4913 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to 4914 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached 4915 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory 4916 or another register. 4917 4918 @node Comm 4919 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} } 4920 4921 @cindex @code{comm} directive 4922 @cindex symbol, common 4923 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a 4924 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol 4925 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a 4926 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will 4927 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an 4928 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with 4929 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space 4930 using the largest size. 4931 4932 @ifset COFF-ELF 4933 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes 4934 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol, 4935 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means 4936 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE 4937 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte 4938 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a 4939 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the 4940 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no 4941 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the 4942 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a 4943 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This 4944 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s 4945 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to 4946 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables. 4947 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object 4948 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}. 4949 @end ifset 4950 4951 @ifset HPPA 4952 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is 4953 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional. 4954 @end ifset 4955 4956 @node Data 4957 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}} 4958 4959 @cindex @code{data} directive 4960 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the 4961 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an 4962 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults 4963 to zero. 4964 4965 @ifset COFF 4966 @node Def 4967 @section @code{.def @var{name}} 4968 4969 @cindex @code{def} directive 4970 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging 4971 @cindex debugging COFF symbols 4972 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the 4973 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered. 4974 @ifset BOUT 4975 4976 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF 4977 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized, 4978 but ignored. 4979 @end ifset 4980 @end ifset 4981 4982 @ifset aout-bout 4983 @node Desc 4984 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}} 4985 4986 @cindex @code{desc} directive 4987 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor 4988 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF 4989 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}) 4990 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression. 4991 4992 @ifset COFF 4993 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is 4994 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out} 4995 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts 4996 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF. 4997 @end ifset 4998 @end ifset 4999 5000 @ifset COFF 5001 @node Dim 5002 @section @code{.dim} 5003 5004 @cindex @code{dim} directive 5005 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information 5006 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF 5007 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging 5008 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside 5009 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. 5010 @ifset BOUT 5011 5012 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when 5013 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but 5014 ignores it. 5015 @end ifset 5016 @end ifset 5017 5018 @node Double 5019 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}} 5020 5021 @cindex @code{double} directive 5022 @cindex floating point numbers (double) 5023 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It 5024 assembles floating point numbers. 5025 @ifset GENERIC 5026 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how 5027 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 5028 @end ifset 5029 @ifclear GENERIC 5030 @ifset IEEEFLOAT 5031 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers 5032 in @sc{ieee} format. 5033 @end ifset 5034 @end ifclear 5035 5036 @node Eject 5037 @section @code{.eject} 5038 5039 @cindex @code{eject} directive 5040 @cindex new page, in listings 5041 @cindex page, in listings 5042 @cindex listing control: new page 5043 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings. 5044 5045 @node Else 5046 @section @code{.else} 5047 5048 @cindex @code{else} directive 5049 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional 5050 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section 5051 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if} 5052 was false. 5053 5054 @node Elseif 5055 @section @code{.elseif} 5056 5057 @cindex @code{elseif} directive 5058 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional 5059 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new 5060 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section. 5061 5062 @node End 5063 @section @code{.end} 5064 5065 @cindex @code{end} directive 5066 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not 5067 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive. 5068 5069 @ifset COFF 5070 @node Endef 5071 @section @code{.endef} 5072 5073 @cindex @code{endef} directive 5074 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with 5075 @code{.def}. 5076 @ifset BOUT 5077 5078 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if 5079 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this 5080 directive but ignores it. 5081 @end ifset 5082 @end ifset 5083 5084 @node Endfunc 5085 @section @code{.endfunc} 5086 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive 5087 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}. 5088 5089 @node Endif 5090 @section @code{.endif} 5091 5092 @cindex @code{endif} directive 5093 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly; 5094 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled 5095 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}. 5096 5097 @node Equ 5098 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5099 5100 @cindex @code{equ} directive 5101 @cindex assigning values to symbols 5102 @cindex symbols, assigning values to 5103 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. 5104 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}. 5105 5106 @ifset HPPA 5107 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is 5108 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}. 5109 @end ifset 5110 5111 @ifset Z80 5112 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is 5113 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}. 5114 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined, 5115 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition. 5116 Compare @ref{Equiv}. 5117 @end ifset 5118 5119 @node Equiv 5120 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5121 @cindex @code{equiv} directive 5122 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that 5123 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a 5124 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be 5125 undefined. 5126 5127 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to 5128 @smallexample 5129 .ifdef SYM 5130 .err 5131 .endif 5132 .equ SYM,VAL 5133 @end smallexample 5134 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition. 5135 5136 @node Eqv 5137 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5138 @cindex @code{eqv} directive 5139 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to 5140 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time 5141 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current 5142 value is taken. 5143 5144 @node Err 5145 @section @code{.err} 5146 @cindex @code{err} directive 5147 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error 5148 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an 5149 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code. 5150 5151 @node Error 5152 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"} 5153 @cindex error directive 5154 5155 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a 5156 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the 5157 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}. 5158 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}. 5159 5160 @smallexample 5161 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested." 5162 @end smallexample 5163 5164 @node Exitm 5165 @section @code{.exitm} 5166 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}. 5167 5168 @node Extern 5169 @section @code{.extern} 5170 5171 @cindex @code{extern} directive 5172 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility 5173 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats 5174 all undefined symbols as external. 5175 5176 @node Fail 5177 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}} 5178 5179 @cindex @code{fail} directive 5180 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500 5181 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less 5182 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will 5183 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside 5184 complex nested macros or conditional assembly. 5185 5186 @node File 5187 @section @code{.file} 5188 @cindex @code{file} directive 5189 5190 @ifclear no-file-dir 5191 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets 5192 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of 5193 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version. 5194 5195 @subheading Default Version 5196 5197 @cindex logical file name 5198 @cindex file name, logical 5199 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we 5200 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is: 5201 5202 @smallexample 5203 .file @var{string} 5204 @end smallexample 5205 5206 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is 5207 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish 5208 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This 5209 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with 5210 old @command{@value{AS}} programs. 5211 5212 @subheading DWARF2 Version 5213 @end ifclear 5214 5215 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames 5216 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is: 5217 5218 @smallexample 5219 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename} 5220 @end smallexample 5221 5222 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the 5223 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string 5224 literal. 5225 5226 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename 5227 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging 5228 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table 5229 entries will have. 5230 5231 @node Fill 5232 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}} 5233 5234 @cindex @code{fill} directive 5235 @cindex writing patterns in memory 5236 @cindex patterns, writing in memory 5237 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions. 5238 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat} 5239 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is 5240 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with 5241 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes 5242 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are 5243 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the 5244 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for. 5245 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order 5246 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is 5247 compatible with other people's assemblers. 5248 5249 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional. 5250 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is 5251 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent, 5252 @var{size} is assumed to be 1. 5253 5254 @node Float 5255 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}} 5256 5257 @cindex floating point numbers (single) 5258 @cindex @code{float} directive 5259 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It 5260 has the same effect as @code{.single}. 5261 @ifset GENERIC 5262 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how 5263 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. 5264 @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 5265 @end ifset 5266 @ifclear GENERIC 5267 @ifset IEEEFLOAT 5268 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers 5269 in @sc{ieee} format. 5270 @end ifset 5271 @end ifclear 5272 5273 @node Func 5274 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]} 5275 @cindex @code{func} directive 5276 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and 5277 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled. 5278 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported. 5279 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name} 5280 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used. 5281 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target. 5282 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type. 5283 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}. 5284 5285 @node Global 5286 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}} 5287 5288 @cindex @code{global} directive 5289 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker 5290 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define 5291 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to 5292 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise, 5293 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name 5294 from another file linked into the same program. 5295 5296 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for 5297 compatibility with other assemblers. 5298 5299 @ifset HPPA 5300 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other 5301 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well. 5302 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}. 5303 @end ifset 5304 5305 @ifset ELF 5306 @node Gnu_attribute 5307 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}} 5308 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}. 5309 5310 @node Hidden 5311 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}} 5312 5313 @cindex @code{hidden} directive 5314 @cindex visibility 5315 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are 5316 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and 5317 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}). 5318 5319 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by 5320 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to 5321 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components. 5322 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well. 5323 @end ifset 5324 5325 @node hword 5326 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}} 5327 5328 @cindex @code{hword} directive 5329 @cindex integers, 16-bit 5330 @cindex numbers, 16-bit 5331 @cindex sixteen bit integers 5332 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits 5333 a 16 bit number for each. 5334 5335 @ifset GENERIC 5336 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target 5337 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}. 5338 @end ifset 5339 @ifclear GENERIC 5340 @ifset W32 5341 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}. 5342 @end ifset 5343 @ifset W16 5344 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}. 5345 @end ifset 5346 @end ifclear 5347 5348 @node Ident 5349 @section @code{.ident} 5350 5351 @cindex @code{ident} directive 5352 5353 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The 5354 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the 5355 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for 5356 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything 5357 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or 5358 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are 5359 emitted to the @code{.comment} section. 5360 5361 @node If 5362 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}} 5363 5364 @cindex conditional assembly 5365 @cindex @code{if} directive 5366 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only 5367 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument 5368 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of 5369 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif} 5370 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the 5371 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}). 5372 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid 5373 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block. 5374 5375 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported: 5376 @table @code 5377 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive 5378 @item .ifdef @var{symbol} 5379 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol} 5380 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined 5381 is considered to be undefined. 5382 5383 @cindex @code{ifb} directive 5384 @item .ifb @var{text} 5385 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty). 5386 5387 @cindex @code{ifc} directive 5388 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2} 5389 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The 5390 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted, 5391 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the 5392 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The 5393 string comparison is case sensitive. 5394 5395 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive 5396 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression} 5397 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero. 5398 5399 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive 5400 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2} 5401 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes. 5402 5403 @cindex @code{ifge} directive 5404 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression} 5405 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or 5406 equal to zero. 5407 5408 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive 5409 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression} 5410 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero. 5411 5412 @cindex @code{ifle} directive 5413 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression} 5414 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal 5415 to zero. 5416 5417 @cindex @code{iflt} directive 5418 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression} 5419 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero. 5420 5421 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive 5422 @item .ifnb @var{text} 5423 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the 5424 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty). 5425 5426 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive 5427 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}. 5428 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the 5429 following section of code if the two strings are not the same. 5430 5431 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive 5432 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive 5433 @item .ifndef @var{symbol} 5434 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol} 5435 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol} 5436 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol 5437 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined. 5438 5439 @cindex @code{ifne} directive 5440 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression} 5441 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero 5442 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}). 5443 5444 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive 5445 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2} 5446 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the 5447 following section of code if the two strings are not the same. 5448 @end table 5449 5450 @node Incbin 5451 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]} 5452 5453 @cindex @code{incbin} directive 5454 @cindex binary files, including 5455 The @code{incbin} directive can be used with @option{--allow-incbin}. 5456 5457 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current 5458 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line 5459 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required 5460 around @var{file}. 5461 5462 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the 5463 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to 5464 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's 5465 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and 5466 after the @code{incbin} directive. 5467 5468 @node Include 5469 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"} 5470 5471 @cindex @code{include} directive 5472 @cindex supporting files, including 5473 @cindex files, including 5474 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified 5475 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as 5476 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the 5477 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You 5478 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option 5479 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required 5480 around @var{file}. 5481 5482 @node Int 5483 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}} 5484 5485 @cindex @code{int} directive 5486 @cindex integers, 32-bit 5487 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas. 5488 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that 5489 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind 5490 of target the assembly is for. 5491 5492 @ifclear GENERIC 5493 @ifset H8 5494 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit 5495 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits 5496 32-bit integers. 5497 @end ifset 5498 @end ifclear 5499 5500 @ifset ELF 5501 @node Internal 5502 @section @code{.internal @var{names}} 5503 5504 @cindex @code{internal} directive 5505 @cindex visibility 5506 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are 5507 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and 5508 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}). 5509 5510 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by 5511 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to 5512 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden} 5513 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific 5514 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well. 5515 @end ifset 5516 5517 @node Irp 5518 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 5519 5520 @cindex @code{irp} directive 5521 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}. 5522 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is 5523 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is 5524 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no 5525 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with 5526 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the 5527 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}. 5528 5529 For example, assembling 5530 5531 @example 5532 .irp param,1,2,3 5533 move d\param,sp@@- 5534 .endr 5535 @end example 5536 5537 is equivalent to assembling 5538 5539 @example 5540 move d1,sp@@- 5541 move d2,sp@@- 5542 move d3,sp@@- 5543 @end example 5544 5545 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}. 5546 5547 @node Irpc 5548 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 5549 5550 @cindex @code{irpc} directive 5551 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}. 5552 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is 5553 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value}, 5554 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is 5555 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is 5556 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to 5557 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}. 5558 5559 For example, assembling 5560 5561 @example 5562 .irpc param,123 5563 move d\param,sp@@- 5564 .endr 5565 @end example 5566 5567 is equivalent to assembling 5568 5569 @example 5570 move d1,sp@@- 5571 move d2,sp@@- 5572 move d3,sp@@- 5573 @end example 5574 5575 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion 5576 at @xref{Macro}. 5577 5578 @node Lcomm 5579 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}} 5580 5581 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive 5582 @cindex local common symbols 5583 @cindex symbols, local common 5584 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common 5585 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are 5586 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss 5587 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol} 5588 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally 5589 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}. 5590 5591 @ifset GENERIC 5592 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This 5593 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section. 5594 @end ifset 5595 5596 @ifset HPPA 5597 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is 5598 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional. 5599 @end ifset 5600 5601 @node Lflags 5602 @section @code{.lflags} 5603 5604 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored) 5605 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other 5606 assemblers, but ignores it. 5607 5608 @ifclear no-line-dir 5609 @node Line 5610 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}} 5611 5612 @cindex @code{line} directive 5613 @cindex logical line number 5614 @ifset aout-bout 5615 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute 5616 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other 5617 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are 5618 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day 5619 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only 5620 for compatibility with existing assembler programs. 5621 @end ifset 5622 5623 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or 5624 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it 5625 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it 5626 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a 5627 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. 5628 5629 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives 5630 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for 5631 debugging. 5632 @end ifclear 5633 5634 @node Linkonce 5635 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]} 5636 @cindex COMDAT 5637 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive 5638 @cindex common sections 5639 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it. 5640 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files, 5641 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file. 5642 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section. 5643 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be 5644 unique. 5645 5646 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this 5647 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable 5648 Executable format used on Windows NT. 5649 5650 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the 5651 following strings. For example: 5652 @smallexample 5653 .linkonce same_size 5654 @end smallexample 5655 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats. 5656 5657 @table @code 5658 @item discard 5659 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default. 5660 5661 @item one_only 5662 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy. 5663 5664 @item same_size 5665 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes. 5666 5667 @item same_contents 5668 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents. 5669 @end table 5670 5671 @node List 5672 @section @code{.list} 5673 5674 @cindex @code{list} directive 5675 @cindex listing control, turning on 5676 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or 5677 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an 5678 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the 5679 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are 5680 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero. 5681 5682 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the 5683 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}), 5684 the initial value of the listing counter is one. 5685 5686 @node Ln 5687 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}} 5688 5689 @cindex @code{ln} directive 5690 @ifclear no-line-dir 5691 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}. 5692 @end ifclear 5693 @ifset no-line-dir 5694 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number} 5695 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical 5696 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a 5697 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical 5698 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. 5699 @ifset BOUT 5700 5701 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is 5702 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF 5703 output format. 5704 @end ifset 5705 @end ifset 5706 5707 @node Loc 5708 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]} 5709 @cindex @code{loc} directive 5710 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, 5711 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line 5712 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly 5713 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column} 5714 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before 5715 the row is added. 5716 5717 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order: 5718 5719 @table @code 5720 @item basic_block 5721 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the 5722 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}. 5723 5724 @item prologue_end 5725 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the 5726 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}. 5727 5728 @item epilogue_begin 5729 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the 5730 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}. 5731 5732 @item is_stmt @var{value} 5733 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the 5734 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be 5735 either 0 or 1. 5736 5737 @item isa @var{value} 5738 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line} 5739 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer. 5740 5741 @item discriminator @var{value} 5742 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line} 5743 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer. 5744 5745 @end table 5746 5747 @node Loc_mark_labels 5748 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}} 5749 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive 5750 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, 5751 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry 5752 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block} 5753 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen. 5754 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable 5755 this function respectively. 5756 5757 @ifset ELF 5758 @node Local 5759 @section @code{.local @var{names}} 5760 5761 @cindex @code{local} directive 5762 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in 5763 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it 5764 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist, 5765 they will be created. 5766 5767 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not 5768 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets, 5769 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm} 5770 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data. 5771 @end ifset 5772 5773 @node Long 5774 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}} 5775 5776 @cindex @code{long} directive 5777 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}. 5778 5779 @ignore 5780 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is 5781 @c what it really ought to do 5782 @node Lsym 5783 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5784 5785 @cindex @code{lsym} directive 5786 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly 5787 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in 5788 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the 5789 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be 5790 the same as the expression value: 5791 @smallexample 5792 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0 5793 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})} 5794 @var{value} = @var{expression} 5795 @end smallexample 5796 @noindent 5797 The new symbol is not flagged as external. 5798 @end ignore 5799 5800 @node Macro 5801 @section @code{.macro} 5802 5803 @cindex macros 5804 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that 5805 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro 5806 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory: 5807 5808 @example 5809 .macro sum from=0, to=5 5810 .long \from 5811 .if \to-\from 5812 sum "(\from+1)",\to 5813 .endif 5814 .endm 5815 @end example 5816 5817 @noindent 5818 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input: 5819 5820 @example 5821 .long 0 5822 .long 1 5823 .long 2 5824 .long 3 5825 .long 4 5826 .long 5 5827 @end example 5828 5829 @ftable @code 5830 @item .macro @var{macname} 5831 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{} 5832 @cindex @code{macro} directive 5833 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro 5834 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name, 5835 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to 5836 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through 5837 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments 5838 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any 5839 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You 5840 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been 5841 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two 5842 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements: 5843 5844 @table @code 5845 @item .macro comm 5846 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no 5847 arguments. 5848 5849 @item .macro plus1 p, p1 5850 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1 5851 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1}, 5852 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write 5853 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments. 5854 5855 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2 5856 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two 5857 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second. 5858 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as 5859 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to 5860 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str 5861 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case 5862 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}). 5863 5864 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg 5865 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three 5866 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but 5867 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal 5868 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time. 5869 5870 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by 5871 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to 5872 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}. 5873 5874 @end table 5875 5876 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly 5877 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be 5878 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain 5879 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon 5880 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the 5881 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final 5882 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter 5883 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole 5884 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this 5885 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example 5886 this macro definition: 5887 5888 @example 5889 .macro label l 5890 \l: 5891 .endm 5892 @end example 5893 5894 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label 5895 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the 5896 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised 5897 identifier. 5898 5899 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.}) 5900 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So 5901 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a 5902 length specifier like this: 5903 5904 @example 5905 .macro opcode base length 5906 \base.\length 5907 .endm 5908 @end example 5909 5910 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l} 5911 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to 5912 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}. 5913 5914 There are several possible ways around this problem: 5915 5916 @table @code 5917 @item Insert white space 5918 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest 5919 solution. eg: 5920 5921 @example 5922 .macro label l 5923 \l : 5924 .endm 5925 @end example 5926 5927 @item Use @samp{\()} 5928 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from 5929 the following text. eg: 5930 5931 @example 5932 .macro opcode base length 5933 \base\().\length 5934 .endm 5935 @end example 5936 5937 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode 5938 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be 5939 used as a separator. eg: 5940 5941 @example 5942 .altmacro 5943 .macro label l 5944 l&: 5945 .endm 5946 @end example 5947 @end table 5948 5949 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops 5950 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp}) 5951 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well. 5952 5953 @item .endm 5954 @cindex @code{endm} directive 5955 Mark the end of a macro definition. 5956 5957 @item .exitm 5958 @cindex @code{exitm} directive 5959 Exit early from the current macro definition. 5960 5961 @cindex number of macros executed 5962 @cindex macros, count executed 5963 @item \@@ 5964 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has 5965 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your 5966 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}. 5967 5968 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ] 5969 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate 5970 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.} 5971 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}. 5972 @end ftable 5973 5974 @node MRI 5975 @section @code{.mri @var{val}} 5976 5977 @cindex @code{mri} directive 5978 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily 5979 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If 5980 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change 5981 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end 5982 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}. 5983 5984 @node Noaltmacro 5985 @section @code{.noaltmacro} 5986 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}. 5987 5988 @node Nolist 5989 @section @code{.nolist} 5990 5991 @cindex @code{nolist} directive 5992 @cindex listing control, turning off 5993 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or 5994 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an 5995 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the 5996 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are 5997 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero. 5998 5999 @node Octa 6000 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}} 6001 6002 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn? 6003 @cindex @code{octa} directive 6004 @cindex integer, 16-byte 6005 @cindex sixteen byte integer 6006 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each 6007 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer. 6008 6009 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes; 6010 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes. 6011 6012 @node Offset 6013 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}} 6014 6015 @cindex @code{offset} directive 6016 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must 6017 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining 6018 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org} 6019 directive. 6020 6021 @node Org 6022 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}} 6023 6024 @cindex @code{org} directive 6025 @cindex location counter, advancing 6026 @cindex advancing location counter 6027 @cindex current address, advancing 6028 Advance the location counter of the current section to 6029 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an 6030 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is, 6031 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the 6032 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible 6033 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute, 6034 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc} 6035 is the same as the current subsection. 6036 6037 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it 6038 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter 6039 backwards. 6040 6041 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific 6042 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual) 6043 @c section. doc (a] cygnus.com 18feb91 6044 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc} 6045 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await 6046 a chance to share your improved assembler. 6047 6048 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not 6049 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other 6050 people's assemblers. 6051 6052 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the 6053 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an 6054 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted, 6055 @var{fill} defaults to zero. 6056 6057 @node P2align 6058 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 6059 6060 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two 6061 @cindex @code{p2align} directive 6062 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular 6063 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the 6064 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after 6065 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location 6066 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a 6067 multiple of 8, no change is needed. 6068 6069 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the 6070 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the 6071 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is 6072 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled 6073 with no-op instructions. 6074 6075 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, 6076 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment 6077 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the 6078 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the 6079 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the 6080 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled 6081 with no-op instructions when appropriate. 6082 6083 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive 6084 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive 6085 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the 6086 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill 6087 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the 6088 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw 6089 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be 6090 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon 6091 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is 6092 undefined. 6093 6094 @ifset ELF 6095 @node PopSection 6096 @section @code{.popsection} 6097 6098 @cindex @code{popsection} directive 6099 @cindex Section Stack 6100 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6101 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), 6102 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous} 6103 (@pxref{Previous}). 6104 6105 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top 6106 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the 6107 stack. 6108 @end ifset 6109 6110 @ifset ELF 6111 @node Previous 6112 @section @code{.previous} 6113 6114 @cindex @code{previous} directive 6115 @cindex Section Stack 6116 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6117 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), 6118 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection} 6119 (@pxref{PopSection}). 6120 6121 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently 6122 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple 6123 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their 6124 subsections). For example: 6125 6126 @smallexample 6127 .section A 6128 .subsection 1 6129 .word 0x1234 6130 .subsection 2 6131 .word 0x5678 6132 .previous 6133 .word 0x9abc 6134 @end smallexample 6135 6136 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of 6137 section A. Whilst: 6138 6139 @smallexample 6140 .section A 6141 .subsection 1 6142 # Now in section A subsection 1 6143 .word 0x1234 6144 .section B 6145 .subsection 0 6146 # Now in section B subsection 0 6147 .word 0x5678 6148 .subsection 1 6149 # Now in section B subsection 1 6150 .word 0x9abc 6151 .previous 6152 # Now in section B subsection 0 6153 .word 0xdef0 6154 @end smallexample 6155 6156 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of 6157 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B. 6158 6159 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with 6160 the top section on the section stack. 6161 @end ifset 6162 6163 @node Print 6164 @section @code{.print @var{string}} 6165 6166 @cindex @code{print} directive 6167 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during 6168 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes. 6169 6170 @ifset ELF 6171 @node Protected 6172 @section @code{.protected @var{names}} 6173 6174 @cindex @code{protected} directive 6175 @cindex visibility 6176 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are 6177 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}). 6178 6179 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by 6180 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to 6181 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the 6182 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that 6183 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt 6184 this. 6185 @end ifset 6186 6187 @node Psize 6188 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}} 6189 6190 @cindex @code{psize} directive 6191 @cindex listing control: paper size 6192 @cindex paper size, for listings 6193 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the 6194 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings. 6195 6196 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count 6197 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the 6198 default width is 200 columns. 6199 6200 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of 6201 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using 6202 @code{.eject}). 6203 6204 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save 6205 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}. 6206 6207 @node Purgem 6208 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}} 6209 6210 @cindex @code{purgem} directive 6211 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be 6212 expanded. @xref{Macro}. 6213 6214 @ifset ELF 6215 @node PushSection 6216 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]} 6217 6218 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive 6219 @cindex Section Stack 6220 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6221 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), 6222 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous} 6223 (@pxref{Previous}). 6224 6225 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the 6226 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and 6227 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional 6228 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same 6229 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive. 6230 @end ifset 6231 6232 @node Quad 6233 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}} 6234 6235 @cindex @code{quad} directive 6236 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For 6237 each bignum, it emits 6238 @ifclear bignum-16 6239 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a 6240 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum. 6241 @cindex eight-byte integer 6242 @cindex integer, 8-byte 6243 6244 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes; 6245 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes. 6246 @end ifclear 6247 @ifset bignum-16 6248 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a 6249 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum. 6250 @cindex sixteen-byte integer 6251 @cindex integer, 16-byte 6252 @end ifset 6253 6254 @node Reloc 6255 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]} 6256 6257 @cindex @code{reloc} directive 6258 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value 6259 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in 6260 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a 6261 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section. 6262 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an 6263 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL 6264 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the 6265 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the 6266 section. 6267 6268 @node Rept 6269 @section @code{.rept @var{count}} 6270 6271 @cindex @code{rept} directive 6272 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next 6273 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times. 6274 6275 For example, assembling 6276 6277 @example 6278 .rept 3 6279 .long 0 6280 .endr 6281 @end example 6282 6283 is equivalent to assembling 6284 6285 @example 6286 .long 0 6287 .long 0 6288 .long 0 6289 @end example 6290 6291 @node Sbttl 6292 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"} 6293 6294 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive 6295 @cindex subtitles for listings 6296 @cindex listing control: subtitle 6297 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the 6298 title line) when generating assembly listings. 6299 6300 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if 6301 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page. 6302 6303 @ifset COFF 6304 @node Scl 6305 @section @code{.scl @var{class}} 6306 6307 @cindex @code{scl} directive 6308 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF) 6309 @cindex COFF symbol storage class 6310 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be 6311 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag 6312 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further 6313 symbolic debugging information. 6314 @ifset BOUT 6315 6316 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when 6317 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}} 6318 accepts this directive but ignores it. 6319 @end ifset 6320 @end ifset 6321 6322 @ifset COFF-ELF 6323 @node Section 6324 @section @code{.section @var{name}} 6325 6326 @cindex named section 6327 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section 6328 named @var{name}. 6329 6330 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily 6331 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even 6332 with a standard @code{a.out} section name. 6333 6334 @ifset COFF 6335 @ifset ELF 6336 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6337 @subheading COFF Version 6338 @end ifset 6339 6340 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version) 6341 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following 6342 ways: 6343 6344 @smallexample 6345 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"] 6346 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}] 6347 @end smallexample 6348 6349 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the 6350 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized: 6351 6352 @table @code 6353 @item b 6354 bss section (uninitialized data) 6355 @item n 6356 section is not loaded 6357 @item w 6358 writable section 6359 @item d 6360 data section 6361 @item e 6362 exclude section from linking 6363 @item r 6364 read-only section 6365 @item x 6366 executable section 6367 @item s 6368 shared section (meaningful for PE targets) 6369 @item a 6370 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version) 6371 @item y 6372 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets) 6373 @item 0-9 6374 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension) 6375 @end table 6376 6377 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If 6378 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be 6379 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes 6380 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it 6381 will be as if no flags had been specified at all. 6382 6383 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is 6384 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}). 6385 @end ifset 6386 6387 @ifset ELF 6388 @ifset COFF 6389 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6390 @subheading ELF Version 6391 @end ifset 6392 6393 @cindex Section Stack 6394 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6395 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection} 6396 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and 6397 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}). 6398 6399 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version) 6400 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this: 6401 6402 @smallexample 6403 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]] 6404 @end smallexample 6405 6406 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions} 6407 @kindex --sectname-subst 6408 @cindex section name substitution 6409 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name} 6410 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported 6411 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example: 6412 6413 @smallexample 6414 .macro exception_code 6415 .section %S.exception 6416 [exception code here] 6417 .previous 6418 .endm 6419 6420 .text 6421 [code] 6422 exception_code 6423 [...] 6424 6425 .section .init 6426 [init code] 6427 exception_code 6428 [...] 6429 @end smallexample 6430 6431 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the 6432 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively. 6433 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are 6434 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that 6435 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code} 6436 macros just for that purpose. 6437 6438 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any 6439 combination of the following characters: 6440 6441 @table @code 6442 @item a 6443 section is allocatable 6444 @item e 6445 section is excluded from executable and shared library. 6446 @item w 6447 section is writable 6448 @item x 6449 section is executable 6450 @item M 6451 section is mergeable 6452 @item S 6453 section contains zero terminated strings 6454 @item G 6455 section is a member of a section group 6456 @item T 6457 section is used for thread-local-storage 6458 @item ? 6459 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any 6460 @item @code{<number>} 6461 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags 6462 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is 6463 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the 6464 resulting value. 6465 @item @code{<target specific>} 6466 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters 6467 @end table 6468 6469 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are 6470 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific 6471 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp}, 6472 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag 6473 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack} 6474 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added. 6475 6476 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants: 6477 6478 @table @code 6479 @item @@progbits 6480 section contains data 6481 @item @@nobits 6482 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space) 6483 @item @@note 6484 section contains data which is used by things other than the program 6485 @item @@init_array 6486 section contains an array of pointers to init functions 6487 @item @@fini_array 6488 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions 6489 @item @@preinit_array 6490 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions 6491 @item @@@code{<number>} 6492 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field. 6493 @item @@@code{<target specific>} 6494 some targets extend this list with their own types 6495 @end table 6496 6497 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be 6498 enclosed in double quotes if necessary. 6499 6500 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg 6501 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the 6502 @code{%} character. 6503 6504 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be 6505 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different 6506 type will generate an error from the assembler. 6507 6508 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must 6509 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this: 6510 6511 @smallexample 6512 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize} 6513 @end smallexample 6514 6515 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size 6516 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and 6517 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is 6518 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with 6519 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an 6520 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string 6521 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus 6522 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first 6523 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}. 6524 6525 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must 6526 be present along with an additional field like this: 6527 6528 @smallexample 6529 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}] 6530 @end smallexample 6531 6532 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this 6533 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain: 6534 6535 @table @code 6536 @item comdat 6537 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained 6538 @item .gnu.linkonce 6539 an alias for comdat 6540 @end table 6541 6542 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for 6543 the Merge flag should come first, like this: 6544 6545 @smallexample 6546 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}] 6547 @end smallexample 6548 6549 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the 6550 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be 6551 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before 6552 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use 6553 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly. 6554 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect. 6555 6556 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If 6557 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have 6558 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor 6559 executable. The section will contain data. 6560 6561 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section} 6562 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler: 6563 6564 @smallexample 6565 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...] 6566 @end smallexample 6567 6568 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma 6569 separated flags: 6570 6571 @table @code 6572 @item #alloc 6573 section is allocatable 6574 @item #write 6575 section is writable 6576 @item #execinstr 6577 section is executable 6578 @item #exclude 6579 section is excluded from executable and shared library. 6580 @item #tls 6581 section is used for thread local storage 6582 @end table 6583 6584 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the 6585 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for 6586 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives 6587 work. 6588 @end ifset 6589 @end ifset 6590 6591 @node Set 6592 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 6593 6594 @cindex @code{set} directive 6595 @cindex symbol value, setting 6596 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This 6597 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to 6598 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains 6599 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}). 6600 6601 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the 6602 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions 6603 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only 6604 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the 6605 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a 6606 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in 6607 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various 6608 different symbols. 6609 6610 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object 6611 file is the last value stored into it. 6612 6613 @ifset Z80 6614 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use 6615 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead. 6616 @end ifset 6617 6618 @node Short 6619 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}} 6620 6621 @cindex @code{short} directive 6622 @ifset GENERIC 6623 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}. 6624 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. 6625 6626 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate 6627 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 6628 @end ifset 6629 @ifclear GENERIC 6630 @ifset W16 6631 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. 6632 @end ifset 6633 @ifset W32 6634 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits 6635 a 16 bit number for each. 6636 @end ifset 6637 @end ifclear 6638 6639 @node Single 6640 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}} 6641 6642 @cindex @code{single} directive 6643 @cindex floating point numbers (single) 6644 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It 6645 has the same effect as @code{.float}. 6646 @ifset GENERIC 6647 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how 6648 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 6649 @end ifset 6650 @ifclear GENERIC 6651 @ifset IEEEFLOAT 6652 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point 6653 numbers in @sc{ieee} format. 6654 @end ifset 6655 @end ifclear 6656 6657 @ifset COFF-ELF 6658 @node Size 6659 @section @code{.size} 6660 6661 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol. 6662 6663 @ifset COFF 6664 @ifset ELF 6665 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6666 @subheading COFF Version 6667 @end ifset 6668 6669 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version) 6670 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside 6671 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this: 6672 6673 @smallexample 6674 .size @var{expression} 6675 @end smallexample 6676 6677 @ifset BOUT 6678 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when 6679 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but 6680 ignores it. 6681 @end ifset 6682 @end ifset 6683 6684 @ifset ELF 6685 @ifset COFF 6686 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6687 @subheading ELF Version 6688 @end ifset 6689 6690 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version) 6691 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this: 6692 6693 @smallexample 6694 .size @var{name} , @var{expression} 6695 @end smallexample 6696 6697 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}. 6698 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label 6699 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function 6700 symbols. 6701 @end ifset 6702 @end ifset 6703 6704 @ifclear no-space-dir 6705 @node Skip 6706 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}} 6707 6708 @cindex @code{skip} directive 6709 @cindex filling memory 6710 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both 6711 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and 6712 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as 6713 @samp{.space}. 6714 @end ifclear 6715 6716 @node Sleb128 6717 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}} 6718 6719 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive 6720 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a 6721 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF 6722 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}. 6723 6724 @ifclear no-space-dir 6725 @node Space 6726 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}} 6727 6728 @cindex @code{space} directive 6729 @cindex filling memory 6730 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both 6731 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma 6732 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same 6733 as @samp{.skip}. 6734 6735 @ifset HPPA 6736 @quotation 6737 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA 6738 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800 6739 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the 6740 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives}, 6741 for a summary. 6742 @end quotation 6743 @end ifset 6744 @end ifclear 6745 6746 @ifset have-stabs 6747 @node Stab 6748 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs} 6749 6750 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for 6751 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives 6752 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}. 6753 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers. 6754 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they 6755 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file. 6756 Up to five fields are required: 6757 6758 @table @var 6759 @item string 6760 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except 6761 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some 6762 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names 6763 using this field. 6764 6765 @item type 6766 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of 6767 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}} 6768 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns. 6769 6770 @item other 6771 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the 6772 low 8 bits of this expression. 6773 6774 @item desc 6775 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16 6776 bits of this expression. 6777 6778 @item value 6779 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value. 6780 @end table 6781 6782 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn}, 6783 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created; 6784 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is 6785 compatible with earlier assemblers! 6786 6787 @table @code 6788 @cindex @code{stabd} directive 6789 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} 6790 6791 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string. 6792 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a 6793 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty 6794 strings. 6795 6796 The symbol's value is set to the location counter, 6797 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol 6798 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was 6799 assembled. 6800 6801 @cindex @code{stabn} directive 6802 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value} 6803 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}. 6804 6805 @cindex @code{stabs} directive 6806 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value} 6807 All five fields are specified. 6808 @end table 6809 @end ifset 6810 @c end have-stabs 6811 6812 @node String 6813 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16} 6814 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}" 6815 6816 @cindex string, copying to object file 6817 @cindex string8, copying to object file 6818 @cindex string16, copying to object file 6819 @cindex string32, copying to object file 6820 @cindex string64, copying to object file 6821 @cindex @code{string} directive 6822 @cindex @code{string8} directive 6823 @cindex @code{string16} directive 6824 @cindex @code{string32} directive 6825 @cindex @code{string64} directive 6826 6827 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than 6828 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a 6829 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte. 6830 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}. 6831 6832 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from 6833 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is 6834 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters 6835 are stored in target endianness byte order. 6836 6837 Example: 6838 @smallexample 6839 .string32 "BYE" 6840 expands to: 6841 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */ 6842 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */ 6843 @end smallexample 6844 6845 6846 @node Struct 6847 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}} 6848 6849 @cindex @code{struct} directive 6850 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression}, 6851 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows: 6852 @smallexample 6853 .struct 0 6854 field1: 6855 .struct field1 + 4 6856 field2: 6857 .struct field2 + 4 6858 field3: 6859 @end smallexample 6860 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol 6861 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the 6862 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to 6863 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section 6864 before further assembly. 6865 6866 @ifset ELF 6867 @node SubSection 6868 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}} 6869 6870 @cindex @code{subsection} directive 6871 @cindex Section Stack 6872 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6873 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), 6874 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous} 6875 (@pxref{Previous}). 6876 6877 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current 6878 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack 6879 in place of the then current top of stack subsection. 6880 @end ifset 6881 6882 @ifset ELF 6883 @node Symver 6884 @section @code{.symver} 6885 @cindex @code{symver} directive 6886 @cindex symbol versioning 6887 @cindex versions of symbols 6888 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes 6889 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is 6890 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library. 6891 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound 6892 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a 6893 shared library. 6894 6895 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this: 6896 @smallexample 6897 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename} 6898 @end smallexample 6899 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file 6900 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol 6901 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we 6902 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't 6903 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name 6904 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name} 6905 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to 6906 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source 6907 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a 6908 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be 6909 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when 6910 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned 6911 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the 6912 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. 6913 6914 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all 6915 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no 6916 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the 6917 symbol table. 6918 6919 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is: 6920 @smallexample 6921 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename} 6922 @end smallexample 6923 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within 6924 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The 6925 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve 6926 references to @var{name2} by the linker. 6927 6928 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is: 6929 @smallexample 6930 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename} 6931 @end smallexample 6932 When @var{name} is not defined within the 6933 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When 6934 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol 6935 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}. 6936 @end ifset 6937 6938 @ifset COFF 6939 @node Tag 6940 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}} 6941 6942 @cindex COFF structure debugging 6943 @cindex structure debugging, COFF 6944 @cindex @code{tag} directive 6945 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging 6946 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside 6947 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure 6948 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures. 6949 @ifset BOUT 6950 6951 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when 6952 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but 6953 ignores it. 6954 @end ifset 6955 @end ifset 6956 6957 @node Text 6958 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}} 6959 6960 @cindex @code{text} directive 6961 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of 6962 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute 6963 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero 6964 is used. 6965 6966 @node Title 6967 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"} 6968 6969 @cindex @code{title} directive 6970 @cindex listing control: title line 6971 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the 6972 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings. 6973 6974 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if 6975 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page. 6976 6977 @ifset COFF-ELF 6978 @node Type 6979 @section @code{.type} 6980 6981 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol. 6982 6983 @ifset COFF 6984 @ifset ELF 6985 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6986 @subheading COFF Version 6987 @end ifset 6988 6989 @cindex COFF symbol type 6990 @cindex symbol type, COFF 6991 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version) 6992 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within 6993 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this: 6994 6995 @smallexample 6996 .type @var{int} 6997 @end smallexample 6998 6999 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table 7000 entry. 7001 7002 @ifset BOUT 7003 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when 7004 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this 7005 directive but ignores it. 7006 @end ifset 7007 @end ifset 7008 7009 @ifset ELF 7010 @ifset COFF 7011 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 7012 @subheading ELF Version 7013 @end ifset 7014 7015 @cindex ELF symbol type 7016 @cindex symbol type, ELF 7017 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version) 7018 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this: 7019 7020 @smallexample 7021 .type @var{name} , @var{type description} 7022 @end smallexample 7023 7024 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a 7025 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes 7026 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide 7027 compatibility with various other assemblers. 7028 7029 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and 7030 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes 7031 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by 7032 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for 7033 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other 7034 assemblers. 7035 7036 The syntaxes supported are: 7037 7038 @smallexample 7039 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE> 7040 .type <name>,#<type> 7041 .type <name>,@@<type> 7042 .type <name>,%<type> 7043 .type <name>,"<type>" 7044 @end smallexample 7045 7046 The types supported are: 7047 7048 @table @gcctabopt 7049 @item STT_FUNC 7050 @itemx function 7051 Mark the symbol as being a function name. 7052 7053 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC 7054 @itemx gnu_indirect_function 7055 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc 7056 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems). 7057 7058 @item STT_OBJECT 7059 @itemx object 7060 Mark the symbol as being a data object. 7061 7062 @item STT_TLS 7063 @itemx tls_object 7064 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object. 7065 7066 @item STT_COMMON 7067 @itemx common 7068 Mark the symbol as being a common data object. 7069 7070 @item STT_NOTYPE 7071 @itemx notype 7072 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness. 7073 7074 @item gnu_unique_object 7075 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker 7076 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this 7077 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU 7078 systems). 7079 7080 @end table 7081 7082 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above. 7083 7084 @end ifset 7085 @end ifset 7086 7087 @node Uleb128 7088 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}} 7089 7090 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive 7091 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a 7092 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF 7093 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}. 7094 7095 @ifset COFF 7096 @node Val 7097 @section @code{.val @var{addr}} 7098 7099 @cindex @code{val} directive 7100 @cindex COFF value attribute 7101 @cindex value attribute, COFF 7102 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs, 7103 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table 7104 entry. 7105 @ifset BOUT 7106 7107 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is 7108 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it. 7109 @end ifset 7110 @end ifset 7111 7112 @ifset ELF 7113 @node Version 7114 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"} 7115 7116 @cindex @code{version} directive 7117 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF 7118 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}. 7119 @end ifset 7120 7121 @ifset ELF 7122 @node VTableEntry 7123 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}} 7124 7125 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive 7126 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a 7127 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}. 7128 7129 @node VTableInherit 7130 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}} 7131 7132 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive 7133 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol 7134 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the 7135 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the 7136 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section. 7137 @end ifset 7138 7139 @node Warning 7140 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"} 7141 @cindex warning directive 7142 Similar to the directive @code{.error} 7143 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning. 7144 7145 @node Weak 7146 @section @code{.weak @var{names}} 7147 7148 @cindex @code{weak} directive 7149 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol 7150 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created. 7151 7152 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This 7153 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol 7154 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created. 7155 7156 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases. 7157 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an 7158 alternate symbol to hold the default value. 7159 7160 @node Weakref 7161 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}} 7162 7163 @cindex @code{weakref} directive 7164 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to 7165 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak. 7166 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol 7167 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the 7168 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table. 7169 7170 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate 7171 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the 7172 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files 7173 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that 7174 had the references to the alias removed. 7175 7176 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled 7177 within the assembler. 7178 7179 @node Word 7180 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}} 7181 7182 @cindex @code{word} directive 7183 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, 7184 separated by commas. 7185 @ifclear GENERIC 7186 @ifset W32 7187 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number. 7188 @end ifset 7189 @ifset W16 7190 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number. 7191 @end ifset 7192 @end ifclear 7193 @ifset GENERIC 7194 7195 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order, 7196 depend on what target computer the assembly is for. 7197 @end ifset 7198 7199 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't 7200 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps. 7201 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 7202 @cindex difference tables altered 7203 @cindex altered difference tables 7204 @quotation 7205 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers} 7206 @end quotation 7207 7208 @ifset GENERIC 7209 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit 7210 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of 7211 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it; 7212 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue. 7213 7214 @end ifset 7215 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works, 7216 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives. 7217 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by 7218 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a 7219 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between 7220 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}} 7221 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label. 7222 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the 7223 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow 7224 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the 7225 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word} 7226 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to 7227 @code{sym2}. 7228 7229 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the 7230 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a 7231 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a 7232 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table, 7233 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3} 7234 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many 7235 entries in the original jump table as necessary. 7236 7237 @ifset INTERNALS 7238 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the 7239 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse 7240 assembly language programmers. 7241 @end ifset 7242 @end ifset 7243 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 7244 7245 @ifclear no-space-dir 7246 @node Zero 7247 @section @code{.zero @var{size}} 7248 7249 @cindex @code{zero} directive 7250 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes 7251 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute 7252 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive 7253 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes 7254 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however. 7255 @end ifclear 7256 7257 @node Deprecated 7258 @section Deprecated Directives 7259 7260 @cindex deprecated directives 7261 @cindex obsolescent directives 7262 One day these directives won't work. 7263 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers. 7264 @table @t 7265 @item .abort 7266 @item .line 7267 @end table 7268 7269 @ifset ELF 7270 @node Object Attributes 7271 @chapter Object Attributes 7272 @cindex object attributes 7273 7274 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture 7275 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike. 7276 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating 7277 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file 7278 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be 7279 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no 7280 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different 7281 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the 7282 newer generation at run-time. 7283 7284 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time, 7285 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link 7286 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file 7287 correctly. 7288 7289 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each 7290 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a 7291 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer, 7292 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string 7293 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing 7294 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value. 7295 7296 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture. 7297 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}. 7298 7299 @menu 7300 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes 7301 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes 7302 @end menu 7303 7304 @node GNU Object Attributes 7305 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes 7306 7307 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute 7308 with vendor @samp{gnu}. 7309 7310 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for 7311 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and 7312 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} & 7313 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for 7314 architecture-dependent ones. 7315 7316 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes 7317 7318 These attributes are valid on all architectures. 7319 7320 @table @r 7321 @item Tag_compatibility (32) 7322 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If 7323 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1, 7324 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater 7325 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private 7326 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name. 7327 @end table 7328 7329 @subsection MIPS Attributes 7330 7331 @table @r 7332 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4) 7333 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7334 7335 @itemize @bullet 7336 @item 7337 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI. 7338 @item 7339 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard 7340 double-precision FPU. 7341 @item 7342 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU. 7343 @item 7344 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI. 7345 @item 7346 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit 7347 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the 7348 number of callee-saved floating-point registers. 7349 @item 7350 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU 7351 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit 7352 general-purpose registers. 7353 @item 7354 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point 7355 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers. 7356 @item 7357 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point 7358 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the 7359 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers. 7360 @end itemize 7361 @end table 7362 7363 @subsection PowerPC Attributes 7364 7365 @table @r 7366 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4) 7367 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7368 7369 @itemize @bullet 7370 @item 7371 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI. 7372 @item 7373 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI. 7374 @item 7375 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI. 7376 @item 7377 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI. 7378 @end itemize 7379 7380 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8) 7381 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7382 7383 @itemize @bullet 7384 @item 7385 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI. 7386 @item 7387 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors. 7388 @item 7389 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors. 7390 @item 7391 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors. 7392 @end itemize 7393 @end table 7394 7395 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes 7396 7397 @table @r 7398 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8) 7399 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7400 7401 @itemize @bullet 7402 @item 7403 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI. 7404 @item 7405 1 for files using software vector ABI. 7406 @item 7407 2 for files using hardware vector ABI. 7408 @end itemize 7409 @end table 7410 7411 @node Defining New Object Attributes 7412 @section Defining New Object Attributes 7413 7414 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you 7415 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils} 7416 mailing list. 7417 7418 @itemize @bullet 7419 @item 7420 This manual, which is the official register of attributes. 7421 @item 7422 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag. 7423 @item 7424 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute 7425 and issue any appropriate link warnings. 7426 @item 7427 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings. 7428 @item 7429 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute. 7430 @item 7431 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically. 7432 @end itemize 7433 7434 @end ifset 7435 7436 @ifset GENERIC 7437 @node Machine Dependencies 7438 @chapter Machine Dependent Features 7439 7440 @cindex machine dependencies 7441 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on 7442 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations 7443 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional 7444 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other 7445 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of 7446 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch 7447 optimization. 7448 7449 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not 7450 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that 7451 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual. 7452 7453 @menu 7454 @ifset AARCH64 7455 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features 7456 @end ifset 7457 @ifset ALPHA 7458 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features 7459 @end ifset 7460 @ifset ARC 7461 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features 7462 @end ifset 7463 @ifset ARM 7464 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features 7465 @end ifset 7466 @ifset AVR 7467 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features 7468 @end ifset 7469 @ifset Blackfin 7470 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features 7471 @end ifset 7472 @ifset CR16 7473 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features 7474 @end ifset 7475 @ifset CRIS 7476 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features 7477 @end ifset 7478 @ifset D10V 7479 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features 7480 @end ifset 7481 @ifset D30V 7482 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features 7483 @end ifset 7484 @ifset EPIPHANY 7485 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features 7486 @end ifset 7487 @ifset H8/300 7488 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features 7489 @end ifset 7490 @ifset HPPA 7491 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features 7492 @end ifset 7493 @ifset I370 7494 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features 7495 @end ifset 7496 @ifset I80386 7497 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features 7498 @end ifset 7499 @ifset I860 7500 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features 7501 @end ifset 7502 @ifset I960 7503 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features 7504 @end ifset 7505 @ifset IA64 7506 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features 7507 @end ifset 7508 @ifset IP2K 7509 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features 7510 @end ifset 7511 @ifset LM32 7512 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features 7513 @end ifset 7514 @ifset M32C 7515 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features 7516 @end ifset 7517 @ifset M32R 7518 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features 7519 @end ifset 7520 @ifset M680X0 7521 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features 7522 @end ifset 7523 @ifset M68HC11 7524 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features 7525 @end ifset 7526 @ifset METAG 7527 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features 7528 @end ifset 7529 @ifset MICROBLAZE 7530 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features 7531 @end ifset 7532 @ifset MIPS 7533 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features 7534 @end ifset 7535 @ifset MMIX 7536 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features 7537 @end ifset 7538 @ifset MSP430 7539 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features 7540 @end ifset 7541 @ifset NDS32 7542 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features 7543 @end ifset 7544 @ifset NIOSII 7545 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features 7546 @end ifset 7547 @ifset NS32K 7548 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features 7549 @end ifset 7550 @ifset PDP11 7551 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features 7552 @end ifset 7553 @ifset PJ 7554 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features 7555 @end ifset 7556 @ifset PPC 7557 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features 7558 @end ifset 7559 @ifset RL78 7560 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features 7561 @end ifset 7562 @ifset RX 7563 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features 7564 @end ifset 7565 @ifset S390 7566 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features 7567 @end ifset 7568 @ifset SCORE 7569 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features 7570 @end ifset 7571 @ifset SH 7572 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features 7573 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features 7574 @end ifset 7575 @ifset SPARC 7576 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features 7577 @end ifset 7578 @ifset TIC54X 7579 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features 7580 @end ifset 7581 @ifset TIC6X 7582 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features 7583 @end ifset 7584 @ifset TILEGX 7585 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features 7586 @end ifset 7587 @ifset TILEPRO 7588 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features 7589 @end ifset 7590 @ifset V850 7591 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features 7592 @end ifset 7593 @ifset VAX 7594 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features 7595 @end ifset 7596 @ifset VISIUM 7597 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features 7598 @end ifset 7599 @ifset XGATE 7600 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features 7601 @end ifset 7602 @ifset XSTORMY16 7603 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features 7604 @end ifset 7605 @ifset XTENSA 7606 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features 7607 @end ifset 7608 @ifset Z80 7609 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features 7610 @end ifset 7611 @ifset Z8000 7612 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features 7613 @end ifset 7614 @end menu 7615 7616 @lowersections 7617 @end ifset 7618 7619 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters* 7620 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a 7621 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called 7622 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each 7623 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of 7624 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH 7625 @c in both conditional blocks. 7626 7627 @ifset AARCH64 7628 @include c-aarch64.texi 7629 @end ifset 7630 7631 @ifset ALPHA 7632 @include c-alpha.texi 7633 @end ifset 7634 7635 @ifset ARC 7636 @include c-arc.texi 7637 @end ifset 7638 7639 @ifset ARM 7640 @include c-arm.texi 7641 @end ifset 7642 7643 @ifset AVR 7644 @include c-avr.texi 7645 @end ifset 7646 7647 @ifset Blackfin 7648 @include c-bfin.texi 7649 @end ifset 7650 7651 @ifset CR16 7652 @include c-cr16.texi 7653 @end ifset 7654 7655 @ifset CRIS 7656 @include c-cris.texi 7657 @end ifset 7658 7659 @ifset Renesas-all 7660 @ifclear GENERIC 7661 @node Machine Dependencies 7662 @chapter Machine Dependent Features 7663 7664 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family, 7665 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This 7666 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each 7667 family. 7668 7669 @menu 7670 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features 7671 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features 7672 @end menu 7673 @lowersections 7674 @end ifclear 7675 @end ifset 7676 7677 @ifset D10V 7678 @include c-d10v.texi 7679 @end ifset 7680 7681 @ifset D30V 7682 @include c-d30v.texi 7683 @end ifset 7684 7685 @ifset EPIPHANY 7686 @include c-epiphany.texi 7687 @end ifset 7688 7689 @ifset H8/300 7690 @include c-h8300.texi 7691 @end ifset 7692 7693 @ifset HPPA 7694 @include c-hppa.texi 7695 @end ifset 7696 7697 @ifset I370 7698 @include c-i370.texi 7699 @end ifset 7700 7701 @ifset I80386 7702 @include c-i386.texi 7703 @end ifset 7704 7705 @ifset I860 7706 @include c-i860.texi 7707 @end ifset 7708 7709 @ifset I960 7710 @include c-i960.texi 7711 @end ifset 7712 7713 @ifset IA64 7714 @include c-ia64.texi 7715 @end ifset 7716 7717 @ifset IP2K 7718 @include c-ip2k.texi 7719 @end ifset 7720 7721 @ifset LM32 7722 @include c-lm32.texi 7723 @end ifset 7724 7725 @ifset M32C 7726 @include c-m32c.texi 7727 @end ifset 7728 7729 @ifset M32R 7730 @include c-m32r.texi 7731 @end ifset 7732 7733 @ifset M680X0 7734 @include c-m68k.texi 7735 @end ifset 7736 7737 @ifset M68HC11 7738 @include c-m68hc11.texi 7739 @end ifset 7740 7741 @ifset METAG 7742 @include c-metag.texi 7743 @end ifset 7744 7745 @ifset MICROBLAZE 7746 @include c-microblaze.texi 7747 @end ifset 7748 7749 @ifset MIPS 7750 @include c-mips.texi 7751 @end ifset 7752 7753 @ifset MMIX 7754 @include c-mmix.texi 7755 @end ifset 7756 7757 @ifset MSP430 7758 @include c-msp430.texi 7759 @end ifset 7760 7761 @ifset NDS32 7762 @include c-nds32.texi 7763 @end ifset 7764 7765 @ifset NIOSII 7766 @include c-nios2.texi 7767 @end ifset 7768 7769 @ifset NS32K 7770 @include c-ns32k.texi 7771 @end ifset 7772 7773 @ifset PDP11 7774 @include c-pdp11.texi 7775 @end ifset 7776 7777 @ifset PJ 7778 @include c-pj.texi 7779 @end ifset 7780 7781 @ifset PPC 7782 @include c-ppc.texi 7783 @end ifset 7784 7785 @ifset RL78 7786 @include c-rl78.texi 7787 @end ifset 7788 7789 @ifset RX 7790 @include c-rx.texi 7791 @end ifset 7792 7793 @ifset S390 7794 @include c-s390.texi 7795 @end ifset 7796 7797 @ifset SCORE 7798 @include c-score.texi 7799 @end ifset 7800 7801 @ifset SH 7802 @include c-sh.texi 7803 @include c-sh64.texi 7804 @end ifset 7805 7806 @ifset SPARC 7807 @include c-sparc.texi 7808 @end ifset 7809 7810 @ifset TIC54X 7811 @include c-tic54x.texi 7812 @end ifset 7813 7814 @ifset TIC6X 7815 @include c-tic6x.texi 7816 @end ifset 7817 7818 @ifset TILEGX 7819 @include c-tilegx.texi 7820 @end ifset 7821 7822 @ifset TILEPRO 7823 @include c-tilepro.texi 7824 @end ifset 7825 7826 @ifset V850 7827 @include c-v850.texi 7828 @end ifset 7829 7830 @ifset VAX 7831 @include c-vax.texi 7832 @end ifset 7833 7834 @ifset VISIUM 7835 @include c-visium.texi 7836 @end ifset 7837 7838 @ifset XGATE 7839 @include c-xgate.texi 7840 @end ifset 7841 7842 @ifset XSTORMY16 7843 @include c-xstormy16.texi 7844 @end ifset 7845 7846 @ifset XTENSA 7847 @include c-xtensa.texi 7848 @end ifset 7849 7850 @ifset Z80 7851 @include c-z80.texi 7852 @end ifset 7853 7854 @ifset Z8000 7855 @include c-z8k.texi 7856 @end ifset 7857 7858 @ifset GENERIC 7859 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter 7860 @raisesections 7861 @end ifset 7862 7863 @node Reporting Bugs 7864 @chapter Reporting Bugs 7865 @cindex bugs in assembler 7866 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler 7867 7868 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable. 7869 7870 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may 7871 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the 7872 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better. 7873 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}. 7874 7875 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the 7876 information that enables us to fix the bug. 7877 7878 @menu 7879 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug? 7880 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs 7881 @end menu 7882 7883 @node Bug Criteria 7884 @section Have You Found a Bug? 7885 @cindex bug criteria 7886 7887 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines: 7888 7889 @itemize @bullet 7890 @cindex fatal signal 7891 @cindex assembler crash 7892 @cindex crash of assembler 7893 @item 7894 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a 7895 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash. 7896 7897 @cindex error on valid input 7898 @item 7899 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug. 7900 7901 @cindex invalid input 7902 @item 7903 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that 7904 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might 7905 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''. 7906 7907 @item 7908 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement 7909 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case. 7910 @end itemize 7911 7912 @node Bug Reporting 7913 @section How to Report Bugs 7914 @cindex bug reports 7915 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting 7916 7917 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If 7918 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you 7919 contact that organization first. 7920 7921 You can find contact information for many support companies and 7922 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs 7923 distribution. 7924 7925 @ifset BUGURL 7926 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}} 7927 to @value{BUGURL}. 7928 @end ifset 7929 7930 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: 7931 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a 7932 fact or leave it out, state it! 7933 7934 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem 7935 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the 7936 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does 7937 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which 7938 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory; 7939 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool 7940 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and 7941 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do, 7942 and the most helpful. 7943 7944 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if 7945 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption 7946 that the bug has not been reported previously. 7947 7948 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a 7949 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We 7950 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate. 7951 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with. 7952 7953 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things: 7954 7955 @itemize @bullet 7956 @item 7957 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start 7958 it with the @samp{--version} argument. 7959 7960 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for 7961 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}. 7962 7963 @item 7964 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source. 7965 7966 @item 7967 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and 7968 version number. 7969 7970 @item 7971 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g. 7972 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''. 7973 7974 @item 7975 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and 7976 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them 7977 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient. 7978 7979 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong 7980 and then we might not encounter the bug. 7981 7982 @item 7983 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when 7984 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the 7985 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source 7986 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use 7987 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a 7988 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how 7989 @command{@value{AS}} is being run. 7990 7991 @item 7992 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is 7993 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.'' 7994 7995 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we 7996 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not 7997 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to 7998 make a mistake. 7999 8000 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so 8001 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of 8002 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C 8003 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours 8004 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we 8005 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to 8006 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our 8007 observations. 8008 8009 @item 8010 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context 8011 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p} 8012 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even 8013 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not 8014 by line number. 8015 8016 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your 8017 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us. 8018 @end itemize 8019 8020 Here are some things that are not necessary: 8021 8022 @itemize @bullet 8023 @item 8024 A description of the envelope of the bug. 8025 8026 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating 8027 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which 8028 changes will not affect it. 8029 8030 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we 8031 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger 8032 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples. 8033 We recommend that you save your time for something else. 8034 8035 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead} 8036 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the 8037 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take 8038 less time, and so on. 8039 8040 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this, 8041 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used. 8042 8043 @item 8044 A patch for the bug. 8045 8046 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit 8047 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that 8048 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide 8049 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all. 8050 8051 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to 8052 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through 8053 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct 8054 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed. 8055 8056 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your 8057 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will 8058 help us to understand. 8059 8060 @item 8061 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on. 8062 8063 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such 8064 things without first using the debugger to find the facts. 8065 @end itemize 8066 8067 @node Acknowledgements 8068 @chapter Acknowledgements 8069 8070 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here, 8071 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the 8072 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently 8073 @c (October 2012), 8074 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}). 8075 8076 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any 8077 more details?} 8078 8079 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug 8080 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and 8081 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}. 8082 8083 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and 8084 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS 8085 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite, 8086 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration 8087 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits 8088 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added 8089 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF 8090 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode 8091 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know'' 8092 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint. 8093 8094 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code 8095 in format-specific I/O modules. 8096 8097 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale 8098 has done much work with it since. 8099 8100 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus. 8101 8102 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support. 8103 8104 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo 8105 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science. 8106 8107 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end 8108 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support 8109 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to 8110 support a.out format. 8111 8112 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k, 8113 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by 8114 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to 8115 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k 8116 targets. 8117 8118 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and 8119 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He 8120 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced 8121 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions 8122 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested 8123 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and 8124 required the proverbial one-bit fix. 8125 8126 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the 8127 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix), 8128 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and 8129 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches. 8130 8131 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings. 8132 8133 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300. 8134 8135 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM) 8136 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object 8137 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at 8138 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support. 8139 8140 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus 8141 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and 8142 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open 8143 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc, 8144 and some initial 64-bit support). 8145 8146 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture. 8147 8148 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD 8149 support for openVMS/Alpha. 8150 8151 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic* 8152 flavors. 8153 8154 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica, 8155 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors. 8156 8157 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and 8158 configuration enhancements. 8159 8160 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture. 8161 8162 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If 8163 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and 8164 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not 8165 intentionally leaving anyone out. 8166 8167 @node GNU Free Documentation License 8168 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License 8169 @include fdl.texi 8170 8171 @node AS Index 8172 @unnumbered AS Index 8173 8174 @printindex cp 8175 8176 @bye 8177 @c Local Variables: 8178 @c fill-column: 79 8179 @c End: 8180